Subject: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: July 29 2014 @ 04:13 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I have moved from Girl's Hockey back to U15 Bantam AA boy's. They start with a body checking clinic in a few weeks and then try-outs. Calgary is a city of 1.2 million people and the players have to play in the organizations which have boundries. All of the hockey up until U13 Pee Wee is organized in these area, I live within the Trails West area and two of my kid's played for Trails West. They have multiple teams for each age group. I think they had 14 Pee Wee teams last year and the kid's are evaluated at the start and play in divisions where the evaluator decide they belong.

When they are done Pee Wee they can move on to what are considered elite organizations that have from U15 Bantam to U20 Jr. B teams. The city is divided into 4 Quadrants and the players must play within the boundaries of the organization. I am coaching with the Royals organization.

The Royals have 3 AA Bantam and one AAA team of U15 players. Because the U18 Midget level is 3 years they have one Minor Midget U16 team, two Midget AA teams and one AAA team which are U18. They have two U20 Jr. B teams. Players wanting to play Jr. A or Major Jr. U20 play in Provincial Jr. A leagues (they can play NCAA from these) or to Major Jr. where they are considered pro and can't play NCAA.

Parents and players really want to be drafted by the CHA major junior teams and they draft Bantam age players. It isn't that big of deal in my mind as the three most successful players I have worked with a lot were never drafted and did pretty well. i.e. Dany Heatley, Mason Raymond, Ryan Duncan (Hobey Baker now playing in Europe).

I am coaching a Bantam AA team and have a good coaching staff and look forward to the season. Jim, my son who has coached college women with me. Ron Gerlitz who played at the U of Calgary and pro in Germany and Alex McDermott who is from Nova Scotia where he played defense and wants to get into coaching. Gaston Schaeffer will be our skating coach and the Roays have a company that works with the goalies and another company who do the off ice training.

Some coaches like me to post my practice plans and comments and this is where they will be.

I am looking forward to the season.



Replies:

Angling Skills

Posted on: July 29 2014 @ 04:19 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We have to teach the players about angling and then progress to checking. The new Bantams didn't have body checking the second year of Pee Wee, so it is important to learn angling first. These are some good video examples.

Practice Drills and Games to Teach Angling

B500 Defensive Drill to Keep the Stick on the Puck – Red Bulls – Gene Reilly

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090803190606500

B500 Defensive Side with Stick on Stick and then Stick on the Puck – Red Bulls

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090817105910820

B5 - Angling Prospect – a walk through stressing a good stick and the approach.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706155119716

C1 - Neutral zone Angling – NHL

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131101142929311

C2 Angling 2-1 Wally – Canadian Women’s Olympic team 1-1 and then 2-1 angle and create loose puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130902174459633

B5 Forecheck Skills Deflect-Steer-Angle-Finish – Red Bulls (I am talking on my cell first part – irritating)

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090813080843840

Angling Drill from Sweden

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140320144146657

B500 Angling and Escapes – Finland

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719114133299

DT400 Half-ice Transition 1 on 1 - Juuso-Yursi - IIHF Symposium – Angle when he puck is dumped in.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131203153607732

DT100, 1 - 1 Passive Support D Join Rush and F Backcheck-Juuso, Jursi – Add dump-in and forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131127145425946

D200 Angling Game – U18 Girl’s demo with a cross ice game.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140406100535268

D200 Straight on Angling Game – U18 Girl’s in a cross ice game.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140607111112834


Penalty Killing with Keith McAdams

Posted on: August 06 2014 @ 05:52 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Good penalty killing presentation by Keith McAdams. 30 minutes.

Good penalty kill talk.

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YOsZWk4eTEo&feature=youtu.be


I have asked my coaches to watch these two clips of Detroit practicing team play. This is our model to work towards this season.


T2-4 D400 PK and PP Rotation-Detroit


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101206083505234

T2-4 D400 Attack and Dzone-Detroit

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101203105712291




Conditioning Camp Practice

Posted on: August 19 2014 @ 06:15 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We are running a conditioning camp this week prior to the try-outs. Coaches take turns. Last night I did one with first year Bantams; 26 skaters and 4 goalies.

Tonight I am doing second year Bantams. I counted 23 skaters and 3 goalies. I will use the same practice plan with this older group.

The players seemed to like the practice last night and most of them came up to thank me after. Of course they want to make a good impression as none of them have played for the Royals before.


Here is the plan.

Conditioning Camp
Practice Plan
Date:18-08-14 Time: 4:15-5:45 Venue: Southland
Notes:
Edges, balance, pass, shoot, agility, 1-1, 2-1 2-2, 3-3, battle, transition

12’
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot
Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite
directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching
as far as possible.
Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the
middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other
net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite.
i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a
new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

12’
B202 Luhowy Puckhandling and Passing Circuit
Key Points:
Control the puck and “lock and load” when you carry the puck; meaning
move it from in front to
your side. Keep a strong skating position with the knees bent and head up.
Description:
Line up behind the top of the circle with 2 or 3 players facing 2 or 3 players
at the other end.
Have between 2 and 4 groups depending on the number of players. A group
of 4 is the smallest.
1. First player in each line skate towards the other line and pass to the far
line.
2. Exchange pucks and pass to opposite line.
3. Skate to red line tight left turn and pass to original line.
4. Repeat but make a tight right turn.
5. Carry toward other player and head and shoulder fakes with legs wide
then pass.
6. Alternate knee touches and pass to far line.
7. Carry the puck and do a lateral push to face the other player and
exchange pucks.
8. Exchange pucks twice then pass to the far end.
*Other passes like backhands, saucer or moves like in the feet, toe drag can
be added.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2008072023504376

10’
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot
Key Points:
This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used
when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players
to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handlingpassing-
shooting should be seamless.
Description:
1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction
passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

12’
B6, 2-0, Regroup, 2-1 Back (large group so we moved to a 2-2 with a hinge)
Key Points:
Forwards pass to the outside and skate to the middle with the
puck. Face the puck all the time. D pivot with the puck. D work
with the goalie and only give away poor shots. Forwards attack
with speed and make the first play early. One high one low; one
fast one slow.
Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave from diagonal corners.
2. D1 leave from diagonal bluelines.
3. F's regroup with D in nzone.
4. F's skate to far blue-D follow.
5. F's turn at own blueline.
6. F's attack 2-2 vs. D1's.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007155153211

12’
B6-600 Flow - Breakout 2 F Shoot - D Point Shot – Finland U20 I wondered if they would catch onto this one but they did after a walk through.
Key Points:
Make hard passes, give a target, keep skating while making plays,
follow shots for rebounds, stop at the net, screen.
Description:
Start at both ends with players on each side of the net and pucks
in all four corners.
1 – D1 start by skating up an back get a puck and bank pass behind
the net to D2. D1 goes to the corner.
2 – D2 pass to F1 breaking along the boards.
3 – F2 skates to the big ice between the dots and pass to F2. D2
follow then circle back to the corner.
4 – F2 skate down and shoot then skate to corner. F1 skate around
the middle circle for a pass from D2.
5 – D1 bump a puck to D2 who skates between the dots and pass
to F1 who skates down ice and shoots.
6 – D2 then follow the play up the ice and get a pass from F2 in
the corner then drag and shoot – F1-F2 screen.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20140426122809756

12'
D400 - 3 on 3 Quick Transition Game
Key Points:
The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the
original attackers must
communicate and cover one attacker each.
Description:
1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3
also if the coach wants to
practice these situations. Upt to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates
waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get
onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other
on how to stop the attack.
5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new
attackers.

12’
DT100 Continuous 2-1, 2-2 – Detroit (we had so many players that I did a 2-2 and then 3-2)
Key Points:
Face the puck. Forwards attack with speed. D stay in the middle
and deny F to F pass. Forwards make the first play near the
offensive blue line to force the D to make a decision. D delay the
play as much as possible.
Description:
1. F1 and F2 attack vs D1.
2. F3 and F4 support D1 as far as the hash marks.
3. D2 support F1 and F2 passively from the point.
4. D1 make a breakout pass to F3 or F4.
5. F3-F4 attack D2 in the other direction.
6. F5 and F6 support D2 and D3 support F3 and F4.
7. Continue this flow.
8. Add a D to make it a 2 on 2.
Options. There could be active support with a 2-1 in the nzone and
a 3-3 at each end. Another option is to combine active and passive
support or add dump ins and regroups.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101208083750407

8’
E1 Shootout Race 1
Key Points
Players must have one skate on the dot at the start. No
hooking or tripping. Skate to get D side and get the puck.
*This is a great contest for puck protection, battling, scoring
and a good anaerobic conditioning exercise. Keep score with
one colour vs the other.
Description
1. Players are lined up behind the face of dots at each end.
2. A player from each team race for the puck which the
coach puts on the middle dot.
3. Protect the puck and try to score vs backchecking
opponent.
4. Another puck on the dot and repeat the other way.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723063235226


Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: August 19 2014 @ 10:02 PM
By: SMAC

Content:

Great Prakky Tom . The Finland drill is a good one . It is a little challenging for first year Bantam !! Good for them !!

----------------
Thanks SMAC. I like to try a chlenging one each practice. I did the same practice last night wit a second year group. 24 skaters and 4 goalies. Before this practice I got half of them to where white with half the D and half F in white and dark. It made the games easy for everyone the quick transition game was percect with 12 at each end. I only did 2 on 2 with the full ice transition game and had 8 F and 8 play D on each team. It takes a rotation or two for everyone to catch on that there are zero whistles but once they got the flow it was great.
I made sure we did a walk thru with 2 d and 2 f for the Finnish drill and it went well. Any time u show really new things the first time they do them is to learn the flow, then u can focus on teaching points. The drills and games kept them moving and gave me a good idea who cam play and think at the same time.

I have the younger group again on Friday and will try to have 4 nets the first 45 min or so.


As the years go by

Posted on: August 21 2014 @ 01:17 AM
By: TomM

Content:

I was looking through some pictures and put some together about various hockey teams and experiences with them and family.

What got me thinking was when I came back from playing hockey in the USA I got a call to coach a Bantam A (they called it then) team. The coach quit because he said they were no good. I agreed to coach. That was about 1973 and I have gone full circle and am coaching basically the same level for the same organization this year. There is a picture of that first team in the pdf. plus a lot of other teams and places.


Royals Article

Posted on: August 21 2014 @ 06:24 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I was asked to write an article for the Royals magazine both in print and online. I refer to a previous posting 'What is Hockey.' for most of the article.
-------------------------------------

I am excited to coach the Bantam AA Blue team this season.

I was asked to write an article for the Royals Magazine and think the topic ‘What Is Hockey’ is relevant to consider as we start a new season. If the coaches and players are going to put their time and effort into becoming ‘elite’, it is important that we know what skills we need to constantly improve.

I play hockey a few times a week with Rich Preston who was a very good NHL player and was assistant coach with the Daryl Sutter and Mike Keenan in Chicago, San Jose Calgary and Major Jr. Head coach in Regina and Lethbridge. http://www.hockeydb.com/ihdb/stats/pdisplay.php?pid=4380 I met for coffee with Rich at Tim Hortons and brought my coaching board with me and listened as he showed me his thoughts on how the game should be played.
Rich stressed that it is critical that a player has to learn to play with speed in all aspects of the game. He must be a great skater, have solid habits where he is always ready for the next play and skates so he can see the ice at all times. Players need to have seamless skills which means that you puck handle, pass and shoot while skating without having to glide between each skill. The game is played with team mates vs. opponents and you have to know where you and everyone else is on the ice. So individual skills have to be appropriate to the situation.

‘Hockey is a Game of Transition

As an introduction I have posted one minute of Detroit vs. Pittsburg video that shows the constant transitions in a hockey game. All of the skating, offensive and defensive skills and good habits are needed to be effective.
The video was prepared by Kai Katajalehto who coaches in Finland.)

Detroit vs. Pittsburgh - a demonstration of the transition between the 3 game situations, and 4 game playing roles in one minute of an NHL game.
The colours are appear at the top right corner when Detroit is:

Yellow – battling for a loose puck.
Green - on offense
Red - on defense.

It is a great example of what really happens in a hockey game and why it is a game of transition. The video link is below.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140409155804705
In one minute there are 7 loose puck situations, Detroit is on offense 7 times and Pittsburg is on offense 4 times. (Detroit was winning the loose puck battles.)

When we look at the game like this we have to re-evaluate our idea of ‘What Is Hockey?’

Here are some hockey facts.

In a game between 2 equal teams with good skills you are playing:

- offense 35% of the time
- defense 35% of the time the puck is loose 30% of the time (not on someones stick)
- The average for someone to carry the puck is about 2.5".
- The average for the team to have the puck is about 4.5".
- Each team has possession and loses possession of the puck about 180-200 times during a game.

So a hockey game is a constant transition between the 4 Game Playing Roles. Every player is
always in one of these roles. There is never a time when a player has nothing to do.

Role One: player has the puck.
Role Two: players supports the puck carrier.
Role Three: player checks the puck carrier with either a pressure or contain decision.
Role Four: player gives either close or farther support to the first checker.

If you look at the game in this manner then you realize that good habits like facing the puck,
always having your stick on the ice, angling, moving to open ice quickly with the puck and again
to open ice once you pass it are essential. It takes a team about 3" to get into good defending
position after losing the puck, so quick transition to the attack is essential if you want to attack an
un-organized defense as compared to an organized defense.

Good technique - at game speed are the tools you need.

So if you want to become an elite player the understanding that hockey is a game of constant transition will help you reach those goals.
Have a great season!

Tom Molloy – Head Coach – Blue Bantam AA Royals


Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: August 21 2014 @ 07:14 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I am going to a Hockey Alberta Coach Seminar in a few hours and will leave Friday afternoon to get back for this practice. We have 4 goalies and 26 skaters so I am going to use 4 nets the first hour.

Royals Conditioning Camp
Practice Plan
Date: 22-08-14 Time: 16:15 Southland
Notes: Use 4 nets the first hour.
26 skaters and 4 goalies.
Pass, shoot, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 4-4, 5-5

10 min.
B5 1-0 Outside-Middle Shots- Czech U17


Key Points: Shoot at the nets on the same side.

Keep skating, give a target and pass hard and pass while moving. Hit the net and follow the shot. Rebound for the next shooter.

Description:
1. All players and pucks are in the middle.
2. One player leave from each side.
3. Player 2 pass to player 1 who circles between the red and blue line.
4. Player 1 skate in and shoot after the third pass.
5. After shooting player 1 circle back and rebound for the next shooter.
6. Alternate sides and player 3 leaves after the first pass.
7. Circle left and right so shots come from both in the middle and the outside lanes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154629528

10 min.
B6 – Wide and Middle x 2 – Pro


Key Points:
Shoot at the nets on the same side.
Pass while skating without coasting first. Make firm passes and keep the stick blade square to the puck.

Description:
1 – Players in all 4 corners with the pucks on one side.
2 – On the whistle one end leave and pass outside of the dots and the other end pass inside the dots.
3 – Shoot at each end and follow the shot for a rebound.

NHL Players
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706224430659

10 min.
C3 Reijo 1-1 Both Sides - Gap Control


Key Points:
Shoot at the nets on the same side.
The defender needs to get within a sticklength of the attacker before the blueline. Attacker should try moves, dekes, fakes, change of pace, shooting beside the D's foot. Both F's and D's should take turns defending and attacking.

Description:
1. Attacker and defender both skate from the middle back to their blueline.
2. Attacker turns and goes 1-1 vs defender.
3. Done on both sides of the ice alternating direction.
4. Could do 2-1, 1-2, 2-2.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823122856482

12 min.
DT400 1-1, 2-2, Support-Attack-Defend


Key Points:
Defending player stay on the defensive side. Supporitng player give a target for the pass and get into an open lane.

Description:
Shoot at the nets on the same side.
1. F1 attack D1 at each end.
2. Players line up on the boards with the first player in line D1 supporting the defense.
3. The coach can determine whether the supporting defender is passive or active.
4. On a turnover or a goal the breakout pass is made to the supporting defender from D1 to F2..
5. Carry the puck to the red line or if the team has a full ice practice, carry the puck to the far blue line.
6. F2 Attack vs. the original attacker F1. Practice various situations

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726104059741

13 min.
DT400 Perry Pearn Game Rotation


Key Points:
Shoot at the nets on the same side.

This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck

Description:
1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102318992

8 min.
E1 Rebound Game


This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.

Key Points:
Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.

Description:
1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter.
3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed.
5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407

17 min.
D100 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench


One net full ice. 4-4 x 2 one shift of 5-5 for 26 skaters

Key Points:
Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on the whistle or on their own.
Pass back to the goalie when changing on the whistle.

Description:
1. Play from 1-1 to 6-5.
2. Change of the whistle or players change on the go.
3. Keep score.
4. If no face-offs then scoring team touch the red line before checking.

10 min.
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Key Points:
The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:
1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227


Hockey Alberta Elite Coaches Seminar

Posted on: August 23 2014 @ 01:20 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The seminar was worthwhile. I am not sure if my association will pay my travel expenses so I stayed in a dorm room for $50 with one thin blanket on the bed. It was ok.

There was a hot stove lounge with all of the presenters answering questions on Thursday night followed by a social. Bill Peters, the new head coach of Carolina was there. Domenic Pittis, the Flames skill coach, other coaches, a sports psychologist, goalie coach. (I will have to check the spelling of the other presenters names) On Friday morning we rotated through four one hour presentations and they threw out a lot of good ideas. Corey McNabb from Hockey Canada showed the new skill video resources that they have put on their website and they are very good.

I drove back to Calgary and ran the practice that I posted before. The four nets kept everyone moving the first hour and I finished with a 20' 4 on 4 scrimmage with 45" shifts and then did a speed scoring shootout.

Today there are 4 try out games that I leave for in 30 minutes. The draft is Friday.


tryout

Posted on: August 24 2014 @ 01:20 PM
By: TomM

Content:

There isn't any time to do anything but the tryouts today. I was at the rink 9 am to 7:30 pm Saturday and it will be the same today with a little longer lunch break. We are identifying 40 out of the 70 13 year olds who will move on to the next phase which is scrimmaging with the 14 year olds. That will happen M to Th evening with one game each per night and then there is a draft of Friday night after the scrimmage.

Just remembered I also run a conditioning camp practice right after the last tryout game.


Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: August 25 2014 @ 01:37 PM
By: ICEMAN

Content:

Good luck and good health Tom

Iceman

----------------------
Thanks Iceman. It is a grind picking th 4 teams.


Conditioning Camp Practice U18 Boy's

Posted on: August 25 2014 @ 01:49 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Long day at the rink. 12 hours.

This mornings paper has an article about Aaron Hyman. He has done the Jasper camp for about ten years. Aaron is making a great impression at the Calgary Hitman Major Jr. camp. He is 6'5" and they talk about what a great skater he is. Good job Gaston.

The 90 minute conditioning practice was with U18 players. I did two passing drills, one 1-1, 2-1 drill and we played various games the rest of practice. There were 25 skaters and 4 goalies so we used 4 nets until the last 20 minutes when we did a full ice 4-4 with 45 second shifts. For the SAG's the players were in 3 groups of 6 and one of 7 and the games were 2 on 2. We did some 3-3 in the cross ice games where half the players were at each end.

We went from 70 13 year olds to 40 and starting tonight they will scrimmage with the second year Bantams and the draft is Friday. So every evening until 11 at the rink this week.
---------------------------------------------------


Royals Practice Plan U18 Boy's - 25 skaters and 4 goalies
Date: 25-08-14 Time: 19:30-21:00 Venue: Southland

Conditioning camp, Game situations, fitness. I will use one zone, cross ice and full ice games to keep them moving. With 4 Goalies I will use 4 nets starting with 2 on each goal line the drills and one zone games then move them across from each other and then remove 2 nets and time 45 second shifts on the main clock.

First Hour Organized with the D7 Game Formation - diagram attached


10 min. 4 Nets
B5 1-0 Outside-Middle Shots- Czech U17


Key Points: = Shoot at the nets on the same side.
Keep skating, give a target and pass hard and pass while moving. Hit the net and follow the shot. Rebound for the next shooter.

Description:
1. All players and pucks are in the middle.
2. One player leave from each side.
3. Player 2 pass to player 1 who circles between the red and blue line.
4. Player 1 skate in and shoot after the third pass.
5. After shooting player 1 circle back and rebound for the next shooter.
6. Alternate sides and player 3 leaves after the first pass.
7. Circle left and right so shots come from both in the middle and the outside lanes.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154629528
10 min.
B6 – Wide and Middle x 2 – Pro 4 Nets


Key Points: Shoot at the nets on the same side.
Pass while skating without coasting first. Make firm passes and keep the stick blade square to the puck.

Description:
1 – Players in all 4 corners with the pucks on one side.
2 – On the whistle one end leave and pass outside of the dots and the other end pass inside the dots.
3 – Shoot at each end and follow the shot for a rebound.

NHL Players
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706224430659

10 min
C3 Rejo 1-1 Both Sides - Gap Control 4 Nets


Key Points:
The defender needs to get within a sticklength of the attacker before the blueline. Attacker should try moves, dekes, fakes, change of pace, shooting beside the D's foot. Both F's and D's should take turns defending and attacking.

Description:
1. Attacker and defender both skate from the middle back to their blueline.
2. Attacker turns and goes 1-1 vs defender.
3. Done on both sides of the ice alternating direction.
4. Could do 2-1, 1-2, 2-2.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823122856482

10 min
DT400 Game of Quick Transition x2 4 Nets


Key Points:
The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.

Description:
1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Upt to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack. 5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

10 min.
DT400 Perry Pearn Game Rotation 4 Nets


Key Points:
This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to 5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.

Description:
1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102318992

10’
D200 Angling Game - Two cross ice games


Key Points:
Checkers create an angle on puck carrier and take away their time and space with body on body and stick on the puck.

Description:
1. D200 lineup outside blue line.
2. On whistle carry the puck behind the net and checkers leave and create good angles.
3. Play 20-30 seconds.
4. Puck carrier can try to come out short side.
5. Keep score. Play to a certain score and losing team do something like push ups. Play a short series.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111005185904685

10 min.
D200 Straight on Angling Game


Key Points:
Both teams go behind their net on the whistle.
Defenders close the gap and maintain the defensive side.

Description:
D200 Straight on Angling Game
1. Teams are lined up behind blue line.
2. On the whistle each team skates behind their net.
3. Attackers try to score and defenders gain a tight gap and D side.
4. Play a cross ice game for 20-30"
5. On whistle pass to coach and the other team is on offense first.
6. Play from 1-1 to 3-3 also using odd man situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111005190114923

20 min. 45" Shifts
D100 Full Ice Game - Various Situations


Key Points:
Switch between all four game roles.
1-puck carrier.
2-puck support.
3-check puck carrier.
4-cover away from the puck.
Situations: offense, defense, loose puck.

Description:
1. Start with the players line up along the boards in the neurtal zone.
2. Play situations from 1-1 to 4-4, including uneven situations like 2 on 3.
3. Play for 30" and pass to teammate on the whistle.
4. On a goal defenders must touch the red line.
5. Keep score.

I am pretty sure the players had never had this type of practice before. There were some very skilled guys there and most of them came up and thanked Jim and I after.





Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: August 25 2014 @ 05:36 PM
By: SMAC

Content:

Hi Tom
Nice meeting you in Red Deer . Wish we had more time to chat .
That is an interesting concept of segregating the 13 year olds then progressing them to the next level . My throw that out to our club . I'm coaching MMAAA and for the first time we are having a 15 year old only skate . If there are any that sure have a look at MAAA they will get a call up . Interesting to see how it goes . We don't skate till Monday. Our Bantams starred Sunday
Good luck this season

----------------------------
It was great meeting you Steve. Too bad we weren't in the same breakout group. I had to leave at 1 to get back for practice.

Good luck with your team.


A - Individual B - Partner - Team Skill Drills

Posted on: August 27 2014 @ 05:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

A - Individual B - Partner - Team Skill Drills

This is a PDF with the individual skill drills,partner skill drills and team play drills vs. zero opponents that I will choose from this season.

They are the best of what I have stolen from other coaches and about ninety percent have video demo's. You can also add the Swedish Skill material that is posted on this forum.


Tournament and Draft

Posted on: August 29 2014 @ 03:12 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I am in Ardrossan a town close to Edmonton playing in the +55 Canadian Championships. We qualified by finishing second in the Alberta games two seasons ago. We split the two games yesterday and have two more today. Final is tomorrow.

I have to go back to the Bantam evaluations right after our game where the top 40 of the 115 trying out are playing and then we have a draft to select the one AAA and three AA teams. Finally we will have a team that starts practice next week. I was evaluation for 30 hours between Sat. and Wed. and the first years played two games a night the week before. So a long time in the rink.

If we make the final I will do the 3.5 hour drive back here for 10:45. It is just lucky I am rich and can afford all of the gas. (We got in the final by beating Ontario 4-2 and won the championship game 5-2.)
---------------------------------
Monday morning.

We had the draft and each team has 26 players. The AAA team has 31 and must drop down to 19. The three AA teams will draft the 12 players that got cut and add 4 to their roster, so we will have 30 and have to get down to 19.

We are getting nasty emails from parents of boy's who didn't make the try-out roster. A lot of good players have already been cut and all of the players that are left are pretty good. I don't think there is anyone that you would say is a terrible player. Just some are better than others, or work harder, etc.. Even if they all are great we can only keep 19 per team and we are all doing our best to pick the ones who deserve to make it.

The ones who don't make it can go back to the community association hockey which is very good in the first few divisions.

Last year 12 000 players participated in Calgary Minor Hockey Week. So there are a lot of good players around. I am coaching what is called Quadrant hockey. The city of 1.2 million people is divided into 4 quadrants so our pool is about 400 000 people with about 15 arenas. About five large hockey associations with 25-50 teams from U6 to U20 each feed into our organization which has Bantam U15, Midget U18 and Jr. B U20 teams. Most of the kid's aspire to play quadrant hockey and it starts at Bantam U15.

Everywhere organizes their programs differently and this is how we do it in Calgary.


Royals Blue Practice Plan: 03-09-14

Posted on: September 03 2014 @ 04:03 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We are still in the try-out phase and have 26 players. 3 goalies, 7 D and 16 F. We will get 4 more players when they are dropped by the AAA team. They will drop 12 and the three AA teams have a draft.

Today's practice has skill warm-up, some situation drills a transition game and a full ice game. I will run the full ice game and allow my assistants to evaluate and rank the players. It is our first session with this group. We practice Friday, play Sat. and practice again on Sunday which is the day we will draft the players coming down from AAA. So I need to drop at least 4 players by then. The feeder organizations are asking when the players will come back as they are also going thru evaluations.

We have seen the first years play about 10 scrimmages and the second years 4 times; so we have a pretty good idea where they rank from those sessions. Now we have to see where they stand on our team. All of the players are good enough to play in the league so we are looking for the ones that have an impact when they are on the ice, work hard, have a positive attitude and are coachable. We have done our homework by asking people about attitude and work ethic and that influenced who we took in the draft. We avoided a few players because of that.

We have about 4 small very skilled players and a lot of bigger players who work hard. We have to see if the small ones can compete and who are the most effective players in the games. We have practice next M-W and play 3 games in a tournament the next weekend. We have be down to 19 players by Sept. 11.
--------------------------------------------
Royals Blue Practice Plan: 03-09-14 Time:18:00-19:30 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:
3 goalies, 7 D, 16 F Evaluation practice with 23 skaters.
Warm up and game playing situations.

8’
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite
directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves
reaching as far as possible.

Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from
the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on
the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the
opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then
get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside
edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite
way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

7’
B2 Transition Skate Shooting


Key Points:
Keep 2 hands on the stick and keep the feet moving. Hit the net.

Description:
B2 Transition Skate Shooting
1. Lineup on blue lines.
2. Skate to top of circle, back to blue, top of circle and shoot.
3. Next player leave when the first is going backward.
4. Each player have 3 or 4 pucks and keep shooting until
they are all gone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120418155124444

8’
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:
Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone.
Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have
shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right
away without over handling.

Description:
1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

10’
T2 B5 5-0 Breakout Practice – U18


Key Points:
Breakout from both sides and practice all the options including D to D passes.

Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in.
2. D go back and get the puck, move between the dots and pass or go D to D.
3. Forwards break out.
4. Pass the puck to the coach.
5. Coach dumps the puck in the other corner for another breakout.
6. Do all of the options, go, counter, wheel, reverse, reverse to wing, over.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20121101085219680

12’
B6, 2-0, Regroup, 2-1 Back Do 1-1 then 2-1


Key Points:
Forwards pass to the outside and skate to the middle with the
puck. Face the puck all the time. D pivot with the puck. D work
with the goalie and only give away poor shots. Forwards attack
with speed and make the first play early. One high one low; one
fast one slow.

Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave from diagonal corners.
2. D1 leave from diagonal bluelines.
3. F's regroup with D in nzone.
4. F's skate to far blue-D follow.
5. F's turn at own blueline.
6. F's attack 2-2 vs. D1's.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007155153211

12’
DT400 Transition Game of 1 on 1, 2-1 - Yursi-Juuso IIHF Symposium


Key Points:
Defender must maintain a tight gap and stay of the defensive side.
Attacker use moves to beat the defender, fight for rebounds and
loose pucks. On the dump-ins the defender must read where the
checker is coming from and the attacker create good checking
angles.

Description:
1.Divide the team into two colours and opposite forwards and
defense play against each other at both ends.
2. F1 attack vs. D1 after skating through the middle circle.
3. Fight for rebounds and loose pucks.
4. On transition pass to F2 at the top of the circle.
5.F2 skate through the middle circle and attack vs. D2.
6. Add a regroup with the forward circling back.
7. Add a neutral zone dump-in and the D and F fight for the loose puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131203153607732

13
C3, 3-0, 3-1, 3-2 - Total Hockey
– Alex rank your D.

Key Points:
Attack with a middle drive and speed. Hit the net and drive for
rebounds. Only allow one pass on the 3-0. Attack with speed and
make plays early while defenders delay the attack.

Description:
1. One group on each side in the neutral zone.
2. Everyone attacks and defends. D will play defense.
3. Play rebounds until a goal or the puck is behind the net or outside the dots.
4. Coach pass new puck if a goal is scored.
5. One defender follow the rush on 3-0 and two follow the 3-1 rush.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2013012209054791

20’
D100 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench
3 on 3 and 4 on 4 45” shifts – Pass to goalie on whistle.

Key Points:
Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on the whistle.
Pass back to the goalie when changing on the whistle.

Description:
1. Play from 1-1 to 6-5.
2. Change of the whistle or players change on the go.
3. Keep score.
4. If no face-offs then scoring team touch the red line before checking.

Jim rank forwards and Alex rank D from bench. Tom on ice.


Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: September 04 2014 @ 11:29 AM
By: ICEMAN

Content:

Hey Tom,

I was wondering what you are looking for when choosing your team. Obviously they have to be able to play, duh Smile

But I while you are putting the players through the practice do you:
- Talk with them - see how they are personally.
- See how they treat other teammates, coaches.
- When it comes down to it, if a player maybe a little "slower" - speed wise, do you take the player with more or better hockey sense or the quicker/faster player.

I read this blog and I would be interested to hear your thoughts

http://coachprusso.com/2014/08/25/recruiting-advice-directly-from-the-mouths-of-college-coaches-30-quotes/

Thank you for everything, and I mean everything,
Iceman
--------------------------------------

Iceman, I just read that blog. I coached college for 17 years, 9 as a head coach and when you recruit you have the opportunity to look for the characteristics the various coaches talk about. Character was the most important factor I focused on because I was watching good players already. Early in my coaching career I didn't pay attention to character and ended up with lots of very selfish players with zero team concept. I remember talking with Willy Desjardins quite a few years ago and his team in Medicine Hat had the poorest season since he got there. I asked him why he thought they didn't do well and right away he said 'It was my fault, I picked Talent over Character'. His record shows that he didn't do that again.

Picking this team is very different than recruiting. They pay the money and then about 150 showed up to to try out. I did as much digging around as I could. I got info from one of my former asst. coaches whose son played last year. My son helps with a skills group that a lot of these kid's train with, so he knows quite a few of them. In the spring camp I saw how one player refused to take his earphones off when the coach was talking and that made him an automatic scratch. So I get as much info as I can and then watch them play.

The first years played a lot of games and we cut that group from 70 to 40. They joined the second years and were in 6 teams and played 4 games and then the draft. We looked for players who could skate and were first on the puck and ranked them according to skill. I have Alex my defenseman coach watching the D and Jim, my forward coach watching the F to see who is most effective in the game situations. Last night we had a lot of 1-1's and 2-1's so Alex could observe the D because he just got back from vacation. He ranked the 7 D the same as Jim. They both watched from the stands and I stayed on to run the scrimmage. It was 15' of 3 on 3 and 5' of 4-4. I had them both rank the players after. We have another practice on Friday and I will have a 30 minute scrimmage. We get 4 players from the AAA team on Sunday. They realease 12 and we get the 1-6-7 picks.

So we only drafted players who compete. Now we are trying to identify the ones who make something happen when they are on the ice. We have a game on Saturday and I have to decide whether I dress the top ranked players to see how they are vs. other AA players or the bottom ranked ones to decide who gets cut.

I just talked with Jim and he needs to see the bottom ranked F's in a real game to see who can play. So we will do that.


Practice Plan 05/09/14

Posted on: September 06 2014 @ 01:29 AM
By: TomM

Content:


Royals Blue Practice Plan 05-09-14 Time: 20:45-22:00 Venue: Rose Kohn

Notes:
3 goalies and 23 skaters
Final practice before first ex game and cuts.
Teach middle drive.

8’
B202 Pass to All Players


Key Points:
Give and go pass. Give a target and make eye contact before passing. Goalies participate.

Description:
1. Blues start with half on each blue line.
2. Reds weave around in the middle.
3. Red pass to each blue player.
4. Alternate sides each pass.
5. Switch every 30".


*Compete to see who makes the most passes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=99

8’
B6 Chaos 3-0 Pass and Shoot


Key Points:
Give a target, pivot to face the puck all the time; use forehand passes and backhand only when passing forward.

Description:
1. Three players leave from each end.
2. Each group passes one puck in nzone.
3. On the whistle player with the puck shoot.
4. Other two players save ice and get a pass from the corner and shoot. a few seconds apart.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101006084345432

10’
B5 Middle Drive and Cycle - 12 Seconds to Score – Both ends


Key Points:
The player in the middle lane skate hard to the top of the goal crease. The two players in opposite wide
lanes are about a quarter of a zone behind. Force the backchecker to make the proper decision.

Description:
1. Players leave from the red line.
2. R1 pass wide to R2 or R3.
3. R1 skate hard to the top of the goal crease and stop.
4. R2 and R3 follow in a second wave behind R1.
5. R3 pass across to R2 who one times the puck on net.
6. Play a rebound or a new puck shot by the coach and work together to score within 12 seconds from
the start.
7. Next group repeat.
8. Create a contest to see how many goals they can score within the time limit.

10’
B600 Double Regroup Attack 3-0


Key Points:
Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:
1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.

*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 3-0 Regroup 2-1 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:
Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. One forward support on the boards and the other from the middle. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:
1. F1 or F2 dump the puck in and D1 skate back for the puck.
2. D2 follow the play.
3. D1 make a breakout pass to F1 or F2 and follow.
4. F1 and F2 regroup with D2 in the neutral zone.
5. F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1.
6. F3 or F4 dump the puck into the far end and D2 skate back for the puck-pass to F3-F4.
7. F3 and F4 regroup with D3 in the neutral zone and attack 2-1 vs. D3.

• Continue this flow.

• Vary the number of F from 1 to 3 and use either 1 or 2 D to create more game recognition situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093348590

10’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 5-0-Regroup-3-2 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:
Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. Forwards support on the boards middle and far wing. D practice D to D options and hinges as well as quick ups. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:
1. F1, F2 or F3 dump the puck in and D1 and D2 skate back for the puck.
2. D3 and D4 follow the play.
3. D1 or D2 make a breakout pass to F1, F2 or F3 and follow up ice.
4. Forwards regroup with D3 and D4 in the neutral zone.
5. F1-F2-F3 attack 3-2 vs. D1-D2.
6. F4-F5-F6 dump in far end and D3-D4 skate back and breakout then repeat flow.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093349684

15’
D100 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench 3-3, 4-4


Key Points:
Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on the whistle.

Pass back to the goalie when changing on the whistle.

Description:
1. Play from 1-1 to 6-5.
2. Change of the whistle or players change on the go.
3. Keep score.
4. If no face-offs then scoring team touch the red line before checking

------
Post practice comment. I gave a little extra time for each drill because I didn't know if the players would catch on to them. They had no problem and did a great job and I didn't have to waste time explaining things again. This added ten minutes that we did a change on the go shootout. I posted a link below. I am sitting the top ranked players and giving the players on the bubble a game before doing our cuts Sunday. I get 4 cuts from the AAA team and that will give me 30 players and we can carry 19.

----------
Played first ex game today and won 7-6. Wasn't pretty but a lot of players showed well. Former NHL player coach Rich Preston talked to the boys between periods and they went out and scored three quick ones. I sat out 7 players who were ranked as our top ones. I have to cut ten or eleven of the ones who played today. We have decided to drop four tomorrow and we get four from the AAA team in a draft tomorrow night.


Blues Practice Plan 07-09-14

Posted on: September 08 2014 @ 04:06 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Blues Practice Plan: 07-09-14 Time: 13:30-14:45 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Puck handling, pass and shoot while skating Battling, screen, cycle, breakout, Game situations, 2-2, 4-4, 3-3

8’A2
Jim Lead Goalies also do
Russian Puck-Handling Warm-up


Key Points:

This can be done every time players go on the ice to expand their muscle memory. The point of
these exercises is to increase the size of the reach with the stickhandling moves, and to separate the upper and lower body.
This is one of the most important exercises a player can do to develop puck handling skills. All the moves can also be practice off ice with various kinds of balls
and pucks.

8’
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot


Key Points:
This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used
when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players
to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handlingpassing-
shooting should be seamless.

Description:
1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

14’
Description:


1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second. Defenders do not check the joker as he
can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243

14’ 2 x 6 min. games
DT400 3-3 Perry Pearn Game Rotation


Key Points:

This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to
5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate
between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations
over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.

Description:

1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004080131252

11’
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2


Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles. Defenders play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush.

Description:

1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 2 on 2 attack F1 and F2 vs D1 and D2.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive F1 and F2 support D and attacking team D1 and D2 support F's.
4. Play 4 on 4 in the zone.
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. The supporting players who joined the play now go 2 on 2 in the other direction.
7. F2 - F3 support D1 and D2 and D3 and D4 support attacking F1 and F2.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101208083750407

20 min.
D100 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench


Key Points:

Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on the whistle or on their own.
Pass back to the goalie when changing on the whistle.

Description:

1. Play from 1-1 to 6-5.
2. Change of the whistle or players change on the go.
3. Keep score.
4. If no face-offs then scoring team touch the red line before checking.
---------------------------------------------------------------

Cut two F and one D tonight. Then a draft of the 12 players the AAA team cut. We chose 1-6-7-12 and got three of our four top ranked players. Two F, one D and one G. Now we know the make-up of our team. We have a practice Monday, Wed and a tournament F-Sat-Sun. We have to get down to 19 players by Thursday.


Blue Practice Plan: 08-09-14

Posted on: September 08 2014 @ 05:55 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan: 08-09-14 Time:17:45-18:45 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes: Evaluation Practice
Warm-up skate and shoot, 3-0 Breakout-Regroup 2-1, 5-0 Breakout-Regroup 3-2 30 minute scrimmage, Shoot-out
Release 4 skaters and 1 goalie after practice.


6’
B6 - 1 High 1 x 2 Low Shooting - Pro


Key Points:

Shoot with your feet moving. Go to the other corner when finished. Rebound for the next shooter.

Description:

1. One player leave from each corner.
2. One high one low on each side.
3. Shoot, follow the shot.
4. Each shooter rebound for the next shooter.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101003085932985

Same drill with agility skating added.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140708231537950

5’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 3-0 Regroup 2-1 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. One forward support on the boards and the other from the middle. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1 or F2 dump the puck in and D1 skate back for the puck.
2. D2 follow the play.
3. D1 make a breakout pass to F1 or F2 and follow.
4. F1 and F2 regroup with D2 in the neutral zone.
5. F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1.
6. F3 or F4 dump the puck into the far end and D2 skate back for the puck-pass to F3-F4.
7. F3 and F4 regroup with D3 in the neutral zone and attack 2-1 vs. D3.

• Continue this flow.

• Vary the number of F from 1 to 3 and use either 1 or 2 D to create more game recognition situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093348590

5’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 5-0-Regroup-3-2 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. Forwards support on the boards middle and far wing. D practice D to D options and hinges as well as quick ups. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1, F2 or F3 dump the puck in and D1 and D2 skate back for the puck.
2. D3 and D4 follow the play.
3. D1 or D2 make a breakout pass to F1, F2 or F3 and follow up ice.
4. Forwards regroup with D3 and D4 in the neutral zone.
5. F1-F2-F3 attack 3-2 vs. D1-D2.
6. F4-F5-F6 dump the puck into the far end and D3-D4 skate back for the puck and breakout.
7. F4-F5-F6 regroup with D5-D6 in the neutral zone and attack 3-2 vs. D3-D4.

• Continue this flow.

• Instead of the first regroup D3 or D4 could dump the puck in the other corner and D1-D2 break out again before the regroup and 3-2.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093349684

30’
D100 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench


Players are divided into two teams of Green vs. Various Colours.

Key Points:

Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on their own.

Face-offs and review Dzone FO alignment.

Description:

1. Play from 1-1 to 6-5.
2. Change of the whistle or players change on the go.
3. Keep score.

9’
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Watch for Speed and Compete
.
Key Points:

The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:

1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227

---------------------------------------
We identified the team we want but weren't able to make any cuts because of a technicality so we will have to release 6 skaters and 2 G after the Wednesday practice. The other teams get 2 ex games and we only got one. So that makes it harder even though we have done lots of game situations they are never the same as a game vs. opponents with enough rest between shifts and a score clock, fans, etc..




Practice Cancelled

Posted on: September 10 2014 @ 11:00 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The plan for our one hour ice time tonight was to warm-up, have a 45 minute scrimmage and then make our final 8 releases BUT we had a big SNOW storm. The wet snow has destroyed the tree that I sit under all summer and the arena had no power so practice has been postponed ti tomorrow. It is the deadline to get down to 19 players. (The most unmanageable number possible for hockey).

It seems like we aren't meant to cut anyone.

We are in a tournament playing one game each day F-S-Sun and have a league ex game Sat. Then we practice Monday and another league ex game on Tues. So five games in five days. We haven't practiced as a team yet and have done no on ice team play.

We also have a parent meeting Sunday when we get back.

I will have to get out my magnetic board to go over things and they will have to learn as we go. I think one concept at a time. i.e. Foreheck game one, dzone 2, pk 3, pp 4. Review 5.

-------------------------------------------
Yikes!! now some parents didn't get the email that practice is cancelled today. Not happy campers but I don't think they want to complain too much given the team still hasn't been finalized. Not good.


Team is finally chosen

Posted on: September 12 2014 @ 01:59 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Tough day at the Arena. We scrimmaged another AA team for an hour and then I had to cut our team from 4 G to 2 G and 23 F to 17 F. Some very sad 13-14 year old boy's. Most of the ones released can play at this level.

Now the team is picked and we can start to develop a team culture and teach them the habits and skills they need to be successful and able to move on to the next level. We play 4 games the next 3 days. One tonight, two tomorrow and one on Sunday. We practice Monday and play again Tuesday. So five games in five days. After the tournament we get on our regular schedule of 3 practices and two games a week for the rest of the month.

When we finally start to practice as a team my focus is going to be on Individual Defensive Skills.
The posting Practice Drills and Games to Teach Angling http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/forum/viewtopic.php?showtopic=6867&topic=6867#6867 has a lot of the activities we will do to work on these skills. You can't play defense until you can win a 1 on 1.



First tournament.

Posted on: September 13 2014 @ 12:45 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Won our first game 5-3 but lost one F (broken collarbone) and one D (concussion and neck injury) and they will both be out a few months. They got all their goals on the power play. We haven't done any team play yet. We play another game this morning and a third late this afternoon.and another tomorrow morning.

We chose players who compete hard and then ranked them on skill and the team did compete very hard.

I hope we don't get any more injuries.
------------------------
Game Two:

The player with the broken collarbone is out 6-8 weeks and the player with the concussion had no structural damage but is very sore and will be treated for a concussion and the length of those varies.

Before the game I brought my 3 dimensional coaching board that has been used by so many famous coaches from around the world. We set it up on a table in the lobby and went over team play. We did the Tsunami forecheck, low press pk and dzone coverage.

I brought in two famous European coaches to show the Forecheck and Defensive zone coverage.


T4 - Defensive Zone Coverage 5 on 5-Mikko


Famous Finnish Coach Mikko talks about defensive zone coverage. First 7 minutes using a white board and then he uses a 3 dimensionsional magnetic board.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110915091504119

TSUNAMI 2-1-2 Forecheck
Jaroslav a famous coach from the Czech Republic shows how you can forecheck aggressively using the concepts of Total Hockey. 1-2-3-4-5 read and react.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2011091410270183


The other team didn't seem like it was AA calibre and we won 10-1. We played very well. We play another game at 5:30 and it will be our third one in 21 hours. Hope we still have some glycogen left in the muscles. The important thing is that they play well and continue to have good habits like facing the puck, taking 3 + hard stride to open ice when they get the puck, doing the middle drive. 4th man up on the rush, etc..

Game Three: This wasn't part of the tournament but was a league exhibition game and we played the team we beat 5-3 and injured two of our players. We just didn't have energy and lost 4-7. We had players covering their scorers but they played soft and lost 1 on 1's on the puck and covering away from the puck. We were very timid the first period and I think the players were afraid of getting hurt because neither injury was the result of a hockey play. I can't say that I blame them.

Game Four: Finished off with a 5-5 tie vs the home team, so we won the tournament wit a 2-0-1 record. We found out we can score but giive up way too many goals. Another ex game on Tuesday and we finally have our first two practices Wed. Th. We have no affiliate players yet, so we will have to have 2D play F again and run with 13 skaters.

We got another injury (deep charlie horse) and a player is gone on a school field trip all week, so we had 7 F and 6 D today so two D played F.

The boy who got hit from behind has some damage to his cv 4 and 5 and a concussion and will be out 6-8 weeks.

It is such a chicken sh-- play to cross check someone from behind into the boards.

Update on Injury: Injured player needs a walker to get around in the hospital and has trouble getting a drinking cup up to his mouth. Today they are allowing him to go home. We are waiting for a prognosis from the doctor.

The organization had a parent meeting to explain fees, fit for track suits and bomber jackets then introduce the coaching staff. We talked a little bit about our philosophy and I explained that our goal is to help them all become better players and winning will take care of itself.

All of these games have showed what we are good at and what we need to work on first which is individual defensive skills. We are not getting outnumbered on the scoring chances against but are losing 1 on 1's and not tying up sticks on rebounds or boxing out in front, etc. I have to get Gaston to work on a few players stride. They don't push sideways initially and that really makes for a short weak push. I have one player who is only 4'10" and 85 lbs. and he is one of the best skaters I have ever coached. We call him little Scott Niedermeyer. One of our forwards is 6' and 200 lbs. So this 13-14 year old age group has the biggest size difference you ever see and the hockey guru's of our country have decided that this is the time to start body checking.

Tuesday game: We had 6 D and 7 F. Dominated the first period and led 2-0. Kind of ran out of gas in the second and the game was tied. Went up 3-2 then they tied it and the game ended 3-3. Two D played F and struggled there.

I tried to do the last few paragraphs on my I phone but make way to many mistakes in spelling.


Blue Practice Plan 17-09-14

Posted on: September 17 2014 @ 07:01 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan Date: 17-09-14 Time: 16:15 Venue: Stu Peppard


Notes:

Only 13 skaters – 3 injuries – 1 school trip 2G, 6D, 7F
Focus on individual defensive skills. Stick on the puck, body on body
Tight gaps, taking sticks in the slot Boxing out in front, angling


10’ – Jim Lead
A2 Russian Puck-Handling Warm-up with Shots


Key Points:

This can be done every time players go on the ice to expand their muscle memory. The point of these exercises is to increase the size of the reach with the stickhandling moves, and to separate the upper and lower body.
This is one of the most important exercises a player can do to develop puck handling skills.

10’ – explain and demonstrate hinging
B600 Double Regroup Options


Key Points:

Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:

1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.

*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

We will do this drill next practice as Wally Kozak came on the ice with us and did some drills that show controlled skating while angling that were a nice lead into the angling drills and games.

8’
B500 Defensive Side with Stick on the Puck


Key Points:

Player checks from the defensive side with the stick always on the attackers stick. Keep the stick on the ice when going side to side.

Description:

1. Two players work together one of offense one on defense.
2. Half rest half actice on the whistle.
3. Practice about 5" and alternate.
4. Start with no puck with offense shielding with the body defender stick on stick.
5. Progress to using a puck.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090817105910820

8’ – Switch ends after 8’
B5 – Neutral Zone Angling – One end – Tom


Key Points:

Mirror the attacker from behind. Keep the attacker on the outside, approach toward the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck, shoulder in front and body on body.

Description:

1. Line up in the neutral zone with a defender following an offensive player with the puck.
2. Offensive player make moves and dekes and then turn either way to attack.
3. Defender mirror the offensive player and turn staying on the inside.
4. Defender close the gap by approaching from about a half stick behind at the inside shoulder.
5. Defender keep the stick on the puck and body on body to angle the attacker and take the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131101142929311

8’
B5 – Angling Along the Boards – Sw – Other end – Jim


Key Points:

Approach the puck carrier from slightly behind angling toward the back of the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck and body on body. Skate through the hands with the inside leg in front and pick up the loose puck.

Description:

1 - Players line up just outside the blue line near the dots, puck are in each corner. 2 - F1 leaves and picks up a puck in the corner then skates up the wide lane. 3 - F2 follows from slightly behind and steers F1 along the boards. 4 - F2 approaches at the back shoulder with 'body on body and stick on the puck.' 5 - F2 angle checks F1 with the inside leg in front then picks up the loose puck. 6 - F2 skates into the slot and shoot - rebounds. 7 - F2 picks up a puck from the opposite corner and F3 becomes the checker.

* Repeat alternating sides.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140625103708719

8’
C2 Angling 2-1 Wally


Key Points:

Defender create an angle from inside to cut the ice in half, deflect the play wide, angle at the back of the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck and finish. Second checker mirror from a little behind.

Description:


1. Coach shoot the puck across the ice on the attacking teams half or dump it softly.
2. Red 1 race for the puck and attack the Blue net.
3. Blue 1 and 2 tag up at the blue line then arc slightly behind the puck carrier to cut the ice in half.
4. Blue 1 close the gap approaching toward the back shoulder with body on body and stick on the puck.
5. Blue 1 rub out Red 1 and Blue 2 pick up the puck.
6. Blue 1 and 2 attack the other way while Red 1 back checks.
7. Repeat with Blue 3 on offense vs. Red 1-2.

* This can also be done as a 1-1 drill to teach the concepts of angling - deflect-steer-angle-finish - body on body stick on puck.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130902174459633

8’
D200 Angling Game


Key Points:


Checkers create an angle on puck carrier and take away their time and space with body on body and stick on the puck.

Description:

1. D200 lineup outside blue line.
2. On whistle carry the puck behind the net and checkers leave and create good angles.
3. Play 20-30 seconds.
4. Puck carrier can try to come out short side.
5. Keep score. Play to a certain score and losing team do something like push ups. Play a short series.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005185904685

8’
D200 Straight on Angling Game


Key Points:

Both teams go behind their net on the whistle.
Defenders close the gap and maintain the defensive side.

Description:

1. Teams are lined up behind blue line.
2. On the whistle each team skates behind their net.
3. Attackers try to score and defenders gain a tight gap and D side.
4. Play a cross ice game for 20-30"
5. On whistle pass to coach and the other team is on offense first.
6. Play from 1-1 to 3-3 also using odd man situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20140607111112834

7’
E1 - D200 Shoot-out Game


Key Points:

As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.

Description:

1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126






Blue Practice Plan18-09-14

Posted on: September 20 2014 @ 03:06 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We redesigned the practice because the goalie coach had a cancellation and showed up for ours, so I had to make some changes to free up one end for him.

Wally Kozak, who is our team mentor came on the ice with me. I have known Wally for 40 years; played against him, helped him coach etc. He was Dave King's asst. with the Men's National Team. He worked with me the practice before on angling techniques from the skating to the stick on the puck and angling drills. This practice he did a Dave King defensive zone play drill that was excellent as well as helped with the rest of practice.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Blue Practice Plan Date: 18-09-14 Time: 16:15-17:30 Venue: Stu Peppard


Notes:

Tying up sticks in the slot. Cover one player Each. Maintain the defensive side. Hinging. Angling. Stick on stick.
Wally Kozak runs Dzone play section Goalie coach work with one tenders at the other.
Choose captains before practice
Each player name 4 who they think would be Good captains.
6 D-2G-8F at practice.

8’
D1 Full Ice All Play – Two Puck Game


Key Points:

Everyone plays shinny style.

Description:

1. All play at the same time.
2. Use two pucks and throw another on the ice when one is scored. Leave the pucks in the net. Count pucks when all three are scored.
3. When the goalie freezes the puck the attackers back up behind the hash marks.
4. Only one shot at a time. If the goalie isn’t watching then a goal doesn’t count.

10’
B600 Double Regroup Options


Key Points:

Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:

1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

8’
B5 Forecheck Skills Deflect-Steer-Angle-Finish


Key Points:

Gene Reilly shows the approach. Cut the ice in half with the stick in the passing lane and steer the player outside the dots. Angle toward the back of the inside shoulder so they can't turn back, then finish shoulder to shoulder and stick on the puck.

Description:

1. Offense group behind the net with pucks.
2. Defenders behind blue line in the middle.
3. Both start on the whistle.
4. Defender force the attacker wide angle and finish.
5. Alternate sides.
6. Players switch lines so they all angle.
7. Move the defenders back to the far blue line as the second step in the skill.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090813080843840

8’
B500 Defensive Drill to Keep the Stick on the Puck – Pro


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090803190606500

7’
B500 Cut Backs and Escape Moves


Key Points:

Protect the puck with the body on offense. Cut back turning toward the boards. Defender stay lined up with the back of the inside shoulder and stick on the puck.

Description:

1. Leave on the whistle and practice cut backs, tight turns. Go to the net on the second whistle while the next players leave.
2. Two players leave and the second player stays on the D side with the stick on the puck and gives passive resistance.
3. This is a battle and the defender tries to get the puck. On the second whistle whoever has the puck go to the net.
*Without goalies both sides can go at once and with a goalie alternate sides. Players switch sides after doing both offense and defense.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011041612155482

20 min.
T3-4 King/Kozak Defensive Zone


Key Points:

Defensive player must quickly close the gamp and maintain defensive side and with stick on the puck, body on body.

Description:

1. Defender or defenders start on two knees in front of the net.
2. Attacker stands waiting for a pass from the coach. If multiple attackers then spread out.
3. Coach passes to the attacker and defender stands and defends.
4. Add another attacker and defender.
6. Add a third attacker.
7. If the puck is cleared, frozen or a goal the coach quickly passes another puck to an attacker and the play re-starts.

*Option is to have uneven situations and add attackers and defenders as you go.

*To create more space the coach and waiting players move back to the blue line. You can go up to 5-5 with this drill.


10’
DT400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support


Key Points:

Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out, switching, all from the defensive side.

Description:

1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second.
Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets
the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition
to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.


*We added the rule to this and the next game that if anyone turned their back on the puck or lost D side all had to do 1 push up and the offender 5. The offending player had to do these without being told.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090726102317243

9’
DT400 Perry Pearn Game Rotation


Key Points:

This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to 5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.

Description:

1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102318992

1’ summary

Pick captains before practice each player gives me 4 names of good candidates. I agreed with their choices and we named captains before going on the ice.
----------------------------
Yikes!! Won 6-5 vs. my two former asst. coaches. We took zero penalties because we had the stick on the puck and hands down. Gave up 5 goals because of throwing the puck away blindly in our end and everyone watching the puck and not getting a man. We didn't lose 1 on 1 battles but were just sloppy in our zone. Last man carrying the puck a few times trying to beat two guys and winger making blind passes into the middle of the ice on breakouts.

Haven't worked on breakouts yet so can't expect better but the game really showed our offensive ability and defensive warts.

Ended the pre-season with a 3-1-2 record.




Blue Practice Plan - 22-09-14

Posted on: September 23 2014 @ 03:20 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is the last practice before we open the season. It is the first time we have done either power play or penalty killing on ice. Only 60 minutes so we have to be efficient.
-----------------------------------------
Blue Practice Plan Date: 22-09-14 Time: 19:00-20:00 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes: Team Play Practice

D moving their feet and working together. Power Play, penalty kill. Puck support game. breakout options

8’
B202 – Shoot – Breakout - Pass Wide - Shoot x 2 – Pro


Key Points:

Give a target, face the puck, follow the shot for a rebound before getting a new puck, pass hard.

Description:

Players line up along the boards and the middle with two lines facing each way.

1. #1’s Start with a shot from the far wing.
2. Get a new puck from the corner and pass to 2 in the middle.
3. #2 make a quick up to 3 in the wide lane.
4. #3 shoot, follow the shot, get a new puck in the corner and pass to 4.
*Continue this flow and players rotate shooter to boards and then to the middle. Do this from both sides.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140918093638947

7’ Rule must be enforced by coaches.
D4 Players Breakout before Attacking


Key Points:

To transition from defense to offense all the players must come out over the blue line and stay on side when they turn back to attack.
The coach can designate modified rules for the game to work on either individual or team play skills.

Description:

1. One team attacks with the puck and tries to score.
2. The defending team must breakout over the blueline and then turn back and attack.

*Individual skills can be worked on. i.e.

- Always face the puck give a target, give and go.


5’ D at one end with Alex F with Jim at other end for 10 minutes.

T1-2 - Breakout Options – Wheel, Go, Counter

Key Points: Principles for the Wheel, Go and Counter, with Terry Johnson a former NHL Defenseman. The key is skating hard to force the checker to commit and then choosing the option.

Description:

1. Coach shoot the puck in and the D skate to the puck and then at a 45 degree angle to force the checker to cross over.
2. Wheel behind the net, cut up near the far post and pass to the point for a shot on net.
3. Critical point is to make the checker do what you want them to. If you skate to where you are going to pass first then the checker can get a good angle and steal the puck.
4. Go by skating hard one way and then tight turn away from pressure. Pass to the point for a shot.
5. Counter when the checker doesn’t chase behind the net.
6. Coach shoots the puck in and the player drive skates behind the net and then tight turns to come back the original way.
7. Pass to the wing who skates out and passes across to the point for a shot on net.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131107182728398

5’
B - T1-2 Breakouts vs. Checker – TJ


Key Points:

The defender must drive skate when they get the puck and read whether the checker chases behind, goes in front etc. Skate at a 45 degree angle to the net to make the checker cross-over and decide to wheel, go(cut back) or counter.

Description:

1. Shoot the puck into the corner and the coach or player gives pressure.
2. Shoulder check and read inside pressure then skate at a 45 degree angle toward the net to make the checker cross-over.
3. Tight turn away from pressure and pass to a player on the boards who passes to another player at the point who shoots.
4. Counter by skating behind the net and out the same way if the checker doesn’t chase behind.
5. Read if the checker is taking away the middle or the boards and pass to the open player.
6. Use a backhand pass if you need to miss the defenders stick in the passing lane or to protect the puck from a checker.
7. Quick feet make everything possible. If everyone is covered then carry the puck up the middle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131108153207415

5’
B5 Middle Drive and Cycle - 10 Seconds to Score


Key Points: Jim with Forwards

The player in the middle lane skate hard to the top of the goal crease. The two players in opposite wide
lanes are about a quarter of a zone behind. Force the backchecker to make the proper decision.

Description:

1. Players leave from the red line.
2. R1 pass wide to R2 or R3.
3. R1 skate hard to the top of the goal crease and stop.
4. R2 and R3 follow in a second wave behind R1.
5. R3 pass across to R2 who one times the puck on net.
6. Play a rebound or a new puck shot by the coach and work together to score within 12 seconds from the start.
7. Next group repeat.
8. Create a contest to see how many goals they can score within the time limit.

5’
D400 - Middle Drive 3-3 - 10 Seconds to Score


Key Points:

Create intensity by only giving 12" for the offense to score. Attacking team uses the middle drive.

Description:

1. Start from the red line and attack 3 on 3.
2. Offensive team use the middle drive.
3. Attackers get 10 seconds to score.
4. Coach blow whistle if it takes too long.
5. On transition or whistle pass to the players at the blue line.
6. Team who was on offense now skate to the blue line and defend.

10’ F and D together
B T1-2 Breakout D to D 3-0 – TJ


Key Points:

Centre must mirror the D from the middle skating parallel and give a target. Stay behind the D so he can skate into the puck. D must drive skate when they get the puck.

Description:

1. Coach pass to D1 who drive skates at a 45 degree angle to the net.
2. D1 pass across to D2 who hinges up ice.
3. D2 pass to the C.
4. Forwards attack 3-0 at the far end.
5. Add D1 to D2 back to D1.
6. Add coach cover one of the D so they either go D to D or tight turn and up to the wing.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131111154200960

15’ Each group work on pp and pk for 5’.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation


Key Points:

Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give. If the D forces then the low play is available, if the F forces then the point is open. If the pk box is passive then there is a 2-1 at each corner, a 3-2 on each side and seams between players to attack. Force the pace by taking a shot by a different player every 3 seconds. Coach in each zone.

Description:

- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Group 1 will practice the pp with Jim while group 2 is active on the pk and group 3 are the Jokers on the pp.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

10’ Use red and green pinnies and 5 whites together to make 3 units of 5.
TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage

Key Points:

Rotation is Attack-Defend-Rest. Number the players so they know when to not defend. In even numbered situations you can require the defenders to breakout into the neutral zone before passing.

Description:

1. Power play attack vs 2 Fand 2 D.
2. Defenders ice the puck and rest.
3. Group waithing at far blue attack.
4. Original attackers now defend 1 short.
5. Goalies rotate in.
6. Create any situation by changing the number of attackers or defenders.
7. Even strength can also be practiced.

*Option is to have waiting players breakout from behind the goal line and do a pk forecheck.





Blue Practice Plan 24-09-14

Posted on: September 24 2014 @ 05:08 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan Date: 24-09-14 Time: 17:45-19:00 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Point shots, shot blocking, 2-0 rush options Big moves, loosen shoulders
1-1, 2-1, regroups, D join rush, F backcheck, Transition
Puck Support 2” game, shoot-out



10’ Jim Demonstrate
A200 Russian Olympic Coach Teaches Puck Handling

Key Points:

Make hard fakes and sell them to the defender. Separate the movement of the upper and lower body. Create puck handling sequences that flow together. Learn to use the forehand and the backhand and have loose shoulders and the hands away from the body. Don’t over handle the puck.

Description:

A. Warm-up with backward cross-over skating and reach with the stick in a balanced position.
B. Practice moves and fakes while skating down the ice and finish with a shot on net.
1. Fake the slapshot with a convicing fake and finish with the stick hitting the ice.
2. Fake the slapshot and accelarate around the defender on the forehand.
3. Fake the slapshot and move like you are going around on the forehand but quickly pull the puck across to the backhand.
4. Fake a backhand pass or shot and rotate the body in a convincing manner.
5. Fake the backhand and pull the puck across to the forehand.
6. Fake the slapshot and pull the puck to the backhand, fake a backhand and pull the puck to the forehand.
7. Fake a wrist shot and spin on the backhand.
8. Fake a wrist shot and spin to the forehand.
9. Fake a backhand shot-across to the forehand then fake a wrist shot and across to the backhand.
10. Combine the moves.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130321101649551

8’
B6 or B4 Crossover Skating and Puckhandling


Key Points:

This is a great skating and puck handling warm up drill. Many variations can be used with the puck or in skating tasks.
Do a different skill in each zone. Keep the feet moving it is crossover in large #8's and not tight turns. You can also do as a B6 and start out of opposite corners.

Description:

Cross Overs and Puck Handling Skills

Do figure 8's in each zone.

1. Quick hands and quick feet fwd
2. Skate backwards
3. Face the far end transition skate
4. Carry puck using only the forehand
5. Use only the backhand.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120418155124444

9’ Forwards at one end go only one direction.

[Jurii 2-0 Sequence - It won't paste here but is on the pdf at the bottom

9’ Defense at one end.

B2 - Defense One Timer Shots x 4 – Sw

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140528164755275

8’ Forwards at one end

B6 - F Block Point Shots – Sw

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140625101436333

10’
C6, 2-0, Regroup, 2-1 Back Do 1-1 then 2-1


Key Points:

Forwards pass to the outside and skate to the middle with the puck. Face the puck all the time. D pivot with the puck. D work with the goalie and only give away poor shots. Forwards attack with speed and make the first play early. One high one low; one fast one slow.

Description:

1. F1 and F2 leave from diagonal corners.
2. D1 leave from diagonal corners.
3. F's regroup with D in nzone.
4. F's skate to far blue-D follow.
5. F's turn at own blueline.
6. F's attack 2-2 vs. D1's.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007155153211

10’
DT100 Continuous - D Join Play - F Backcheck


Start 1-1 move to 2-1

Key Points:

On transition all the players must go from offense to defense and defense to offense.
Sequence: Forwards - give passive support - attack - backcheck - defend - make breakout - rest.
Defense - give passive support - defend - join attack - forecheck-rest.

Description:

In the diagram the F are circles and D are triangles. Positions are labelled.

1. Blue F1 and F2 attack vs Red D1.
2. Red F1 and F2 and Blue D1 give passive support above circles. (as in a Erkka)
3. On transition, after a goal or frozen puck red D1 pass up to red F1 or F2.
4. Red F1 and F2 attack vs Blue D1.
5. Original attackers blue F1 and F2 backcheck and original defeder red D1 join the attack.
6. Play 3-3 in the zone
7. Blue F3 and F4 and red D2 wait above circles to transition the other way and blue D1 join the attack while red F1 and F2 backcheck
8. Red D2 and blue F3 and F4 support from above the circles ready to go the other way. Continue this rotation.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

12’
D1-D100 Two Second Game


Key Points:

Supporting players must give close support plus depth and width. Puck carrier must skate hard to open ice and use escape moves, drive skating and cut backs to create passing lanes.
*This game can be played full, cross, half ice.

Great game for on ice awareness, passing skills and offensive support and defensive coverage.


Description:

1. Play full ice with either all the players on the ice at once or in shifts.
2. Players can be in possession of the puck for a maximum of 2 seconds.
3. Stress that when you get the puck the order of priorities should be:
A-Make a play.
B-Regroup.
C-Gain a zone.
3. When over 2 seconds the other team gets the puck (coach monitor).

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110324143851598

8’
E1 2-0 Change on Go Shootout – 1 Pass Maximum


Key Points:

The main goal of this shootout is for the goalies to battle and never give up on shots. It is more realistic if only one pass per shot is allowed but if the goal is for the goalie to battle put no restrictions on the shooters.

Description:
1. Half the team in each box and as many pucks on the blue line as the number of the largest team.
2. Two players leave from the box, get a puck from the blue line and shoot until they score.
3. After scoring race back and touch the player box gate so the next two can leave.
4. First team to score all the pucks wins.
5. Losers do a chore or exercise.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121109085854143

---------------------------------------------------------
Most of the practice went well but I wasn't pleased with the Point Shot Drill. We need to have the next pair ready to shoot right away and the pair that just finished rotate. We have 6 D now so 2 groups of 3 would have been much more active with more shots. First time I have done it.
The transition game was a disaster. These players haven't done full ice transition games and I should have started with a simple continuous 1-1, 2-1 instead of having the D join and F backcheck. They need to learn the flow and then adding more players is easy. I started at step 3 instead of step 1. We played the 2" game 3 on 3 but had to with only 14 skaters. One was sick. It is a real challenge for them right now as they are not used to doing things right away like moving to open ice, getting their head up, getting open, give and going. We will do this game in different forms all season.

Fitness testing tonight, a practice Friday, game Saturday, practice Sunday, Monday and game Tuesday. We lost the first game 2-1 even though we tied it with 12" left. The ref blew his whistle for some unknown reason as we were shooting the puck into the empty net. He apologized after but the goal didn't count. We played very well.






Blue Practice Plan - 26-09-14

Posted on: September 26 2014 @ 04:16 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Team was tested for fitness and was all over the place on the beep test. Excellent to poor.

-----------------------------------------------------
Blue Practice Plan Date: 26-09-14 Time: 20:15-21:30 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Breakout, defensive zone review, protect puck, escape moves,
Point shots, screening the goalie, 1-1, 2-1 Puck support, loose shoulders




8’
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:

3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from
the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3
lanes and shoot.

Description:

1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

7’
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:

Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling the puck.
Stress taking the pass in the sweet spot, keep the puck ahead so you can see it (not behind your skates) and shoot while skating. Always follow the shot for a rebound.

Description:

1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

7’
B6 Point Shots


Key Points:


Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.

Description:

Option One

a. One pass to two and then screen goalie.
b. Two drag and shoot.
c. One go to point for a shot then opposite corner.
d. Three pass to four then screen goalie.
e. Four drag and shoot.

Option Two

f. Two stay at the mid point and get a pass from four and shoot before rotating.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462

8’
DT400 Active Jokers at Point


Key Points

Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots.
This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot

Description:

Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.

1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.

Part Two:

4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

5’ Pass D to W then D to C

B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A and B

Key Points:


This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice aimlessly.


- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.

Description:

A. Coach shoots puck in and D gets the puck and passes to the wing who times his skating from inside to outside. D to W back to D and up to wing. Then repeat on the other side. All forwards
take turns getting the pass on the wing. Then do D to C.

B. Coach shoots the puck in and D skates back to get in while the wing times his skating from the middle to the outside lane. http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20080720200745971
The D drives the back of the net and stops and goes out the same direction making a counter pass

5’
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine C and D


Key Points:

Defenseman Shoulder check on the way to read the forechecking pressure.
Forwards read the play from the middle lane and time it so they are skating up the boards for the pass. If the forechecker follows you behind use the reverse.

Description:

C. Coach dumps the puck in and the D gets in and drive skates hard to the back of the net and up the ice between the dots. Pass D to C to D to W.
D. Coach dumps the puck in and the D gets it and drive skates to the back of the net to draw the forechecker then passes back off the boards to the other D who has called reverse from the front of the net. D2 passes to C to D2 to W and out.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200746400

10’
DT100 Continuous 1-1. 2-1


Key Points:

New players don't leave the line-up until the puck enters the offensive zone. On dump outs no one change but go back and regroup with the same players. Changes occur when the puck is over the offensive blue line or controlled over the defensive blue line.

Description:

1. Attack 1-1 with D getting support from 1 F and F from one D.
2. Defending F1 cover the point.
3. New offensive D join and play point.
4. On transition attack 1-1 thru nzone.
5. Continue flow with new O and D support. -Continue the flow of 1-1 in nzone and 2-2 at each end.

-Dump-ins and regroups can be added.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726085538618

10’ Goalies rotate at the other end.

T4 Teaching Defensive Zone Coverage 2-1-2


Key Points:

Tie up sticks in the slot, keep sticks in the passing lane and shin pads in front of the
puck.
When doing man on and box behind closest player is aggressive from the inside to the
outside body on body and stick on the puck.

Description:

Teach defensive zone coverage by giving the offense 45 seconds to score.


A. Play a tight box and one in the low slot area. Players can only move a few strides but
stay in a tight 2-1-2 formation.

B. Closest defender pressure the puck right away while teammates form a box behind.
When the puck is passed away drop to a corner of the box or take the player to the net.
If the offense has three attackers cycling on one side D2 must move to that side and F2
drops to the hash marks to cover the front of the net.

8’ Goalies alternate at far end.
T4 Defensive Zone Coverage 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 3-2, 3-5 - Pro


Key Points
:
The defenders must read even and outnumber situations and the star and then recognize their responsibility on the 3 on 5.

Description:

Players wait outside the blue line and the coach changes the situation.

1 – Dump the puck in and start with a 1-1.
2 – Add an offensive player for 2-1.
3 – Defenseman comes in for 2-2.
4 – Add a new attacker for a 3-2.
5 – Three defending forwards come in and defend the 3-5.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140708225546829

Looking at the same drill thinking about the offensive attack.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140108160938392

7’
E1 Shootout 2 Shots


Key Points:

Players should come in and make a hard move and shoot. The general rule on a breakaway is if the goalie is out far deke and if he backs in shoot.

Description:

1. Teams lines up across from each other and the pucks are in the middle circle.
2. One player from each team leaves and shoot at opposite ends.
3. The same players turn back and get another puck from the middle and shoot at the other end.
4. Continue until all the players have shot and keep score.
- You can also decide the winner by saying the most goals in a certain time or the first team to 10 or another total wins.
- Players that score no goals do 2 laps, those who score one goal skate one lap and those who score on both shots zero laps.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100913081621644

---------------------------------------
This was the best practice we have had so far. Tempo was good and the players were engaged. They were working so hard in the full ice transition game that I let it go longer and we didn't do the shootout at the end. I let the coach work with my goalies a little longer and we didn't use a goalie for the team play drill at the end.
Instead of positions for the continuous 1-1 and 2-1 I had the whites vs. the darks and the next players left and had to play either forward or defense according to reading the game 1-2-3-4-5. We are teaching 'Total Hockey', so it was perfect for that. I am going to use this flow but vary the situations by sending out different numbers of players from each team. We did this with a different transition game when I was coaching with Willie Desjardins at the university. 1-2 or 3 players support the rush or the defense and they have to communicate. I am going to write it up for the Daily Drills section .





Blue Practice Plan 28-03-14

Posted on: September 28 2014 @ 09:30 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 28-03-14 Time: 10:00-11:15 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:

Focus is on individual offensive skill and Team offensive skill. Puck handling, support
Scoring, escape moves, team breakouts.



6’
A300 x 2 Skating and Puck Handling Warm-up with Shots


Key Points:

Do various moves with the puck and finish with a shot.
Description: One group rotate clockwise and the other counter clockwise. 1. Do various skating moves with the puck. 2. Big moves all around the body, in the skates, through the legs etc.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121031084114911

8’
B6 3-0 Weave-Regroup at Far End – Pro


Key Points:

Principles: Pass while skating and then follow the pass and take the ice behind the puck carrier.. Fill the 3 lanes. Skate to the “big ice” between the dots when you get the puck. Pass to the outside lane, skate to the inside lane.

Description:

A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass.
B. 2 skate to the big ice, pass to 3, follow the pass taking the ice behind.
C. 3 pass back to one, follow the pass.
D. 1 regroup with 4 and 1-2-3 fill each lane.
E. 4 pass to 1 or 3 on the strong side.
F. 1-2-3 weave the same way and attack with a triangle and shoot at the oringinal end.
G. 4-5-6 follow and repeat the other way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130125095322120

30’
Skills Warm up Finnish U17


Key Points:

Alex take the Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards work on puck handling in the middle with Jim. Instead of a goalie coach Tom work on scoring skills.

Description

A. Work on breakouts in units of 5,
B. Group in middle do stick handling.
C. third group do scoring.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140131221040649

Tournament

– Keep track of wins.

Game one
1 vs 4 2 vs 3

7’ - Play 4-4 at two ends.
DT5 Two Pass


Key Points:

This transition game requires on ice awareness and constant switching between game playing roles as
well as loose puck situations. Escape moves create time and space for the player. The puck carrier must
slide backward, sideways, tight turn etc.

Description:

Rules: You must make two passes before you can score and the puck must stay in the zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005152420831

7’ Game Two – 2 vs 4 and 1 vs 3

D4 – Two second game and Players Breakout before Attacking


Key Points:

To transition from defense to offense all the players must come out over the blue line and stay on side when they turn back to attack.
The coach can designate modified rules for the game to work on either individual or team play skills.

Description:

1. One team attacks with the puck and tries to score.
2. The defending team must breakout over the blueline and then turn back and attack.
2” only with the puck.


7’ Game three 3-4 and 1-2

Rule: Only one pass allowed in the offensive zone.

10’
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout Key Points:


Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes. Description:

1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.
*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595
--------------------------
Played the night before and won 3-0. 51 shots for and 29 shots against. Their chances came from sloppy blind passes or turn-overs on high rish/low reward situations. We work very hard and only got one coincedental penalty because our sticks are on the ice and on the puck for the most part. This creates great checking angles and lots of turn-overs. Their goalie played very well. Our goalie had to earn his shutout because of the turn-overs.

We did this practice this morning and it had good tempo and we accomplished a lot. Jim said that a lot of the players have a hard time stick handling around their body becaue the hands are too wide apart and gripping the middle of the stick too tightly. I focused on offensive zone team play and introduced more power play options that are also good for even strength. Alex said the breakouts were good except for players passing much too softly. Many players struggled with the weave and didn't get into the wide lanes.

So we have lots of work to do. 30 SA is too many and we should be scoring more with 51 SF. Enforcing the rule that they must do 3 push ups every time they miss the net in drills has been effective because we hit the net on almost every shot in the game.
:





Blue Practice Plan 29-09-14

Posted on: September 29 2014 @ 10:28 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Lotsa practices in a row with no game til Saturday so I want to really get the players better at puck handling and playing with good offensive habits. We are going to work in stations with the goalies at one end, Jim doing stickhandling and Alex and I a game with the stick upside down for D side practice. We then play 'games that teach the game.' the rest of practice. I have three more sessions this week before our Saturday game vs. a very skilled team.
------------------------------------------------------


Blue Practice Plan Date: 29-09-14 Time: 20:15-21:30 Venue: Stu Peppard


Notes:
Theme of the Practice is ‘Good Playing Habits” Face the puck, stick on the ice,
3 hard strides with the puck, Face the play With the puck. Escape moves, puck control
360 degrees, puck support Keeping defensive side with stick upside Down.
Sport Psychologist meet with the team Before practice to discuss team building
Ideas.

10’ Jim lead.
A200 Russian Puck Handling – Fake Shots and Finish with a Shot


Key Points:

The idea of stick handling is to protect the puck from the opponent or to make him/her reach or straighten their knees and then go around them. Vladimir Jursinov is probably the most successful skills coach in the world. This Soviet and Russian Olympic coach has helped more than 65 players into the NHL from his teams. He leads a group of 15-20 years olds in a fake shot sequence.

Description:

Players are in four lines and do multiple fake shots and moves, then finish with a shot.

. Practice Faking a slapshot with a hard back swing.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the backhand side.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the forehand side.
. Fake a slapshot and then do a backhand tight turn around opponent.
. Fake a slapshot and reach out like you are going around the opponent on your forehand and then pull the puck quickly to your backhand and go around opponent.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130321101649551

8’ Focus is to always face the puck – Middle Drive
B202 - 3 on 0 Neutral Zone Passes - Pro Key Point: Make one touch pass to each player. Face the puck and give a target.

Description:

1. Players line up behind the blue line in 3 lines.
2. On whistle leave and exchange one touch passes in the neutral zone to each player.
3. Attack 3-0 at the original end.
4. Opposite group repeat.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090818155459550

20’ 10’ x 2

Two stations. Jim Puckhandling – Tom and Alex DT400 Game


One end Goalie work Jim – in middle Puck handle.


JF with one goalie at a time.

10’ x 2
DT400 1-1, 2-2, Support-Attack-Defend


Key Points:

Defending player stay on the defensive side. Supporitng player give a target for the pass and get into an open lane.

Description:

Defend with Stick upside Down turn stick upright after the first shot.

1.F1 attack D1 at each end.
2. Players line up on the boards with the first player in line D1 supporting the defense.
3. The coach can determine whether the supporting defender is passive or active.
4. On a turnover or a goal the breakout pass is made to the supporting defender from D1 to F2..
5. Carry the puck to the red line or if the team has a full ice practice, carry the puck to the far blue line.
6. F2 Attack vs. the original attacker F1. Practice various situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726104059741

12 ‘ 45” shifts
D1 One Pass in Each Zone


Key Points:


Close support, skate to open ice with the puck, give a target.

Description:

1. Play full ice either in shifts or all on the ice at once.
2. There must be at least one pass made in each zone. If not the other team gets the puck.
3. Controlled scrimmage so everyone stop on the whistle for coach input.
4. With shifts in a D100 game pass back to the goalie on the whistle.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011032414361323

8’ Take 1’ to put pinnies on two teams.

1 vs 4 and 2 vs 3
D4 Two Pass Game with only Forehand Passes


Key Points:

This game causes a few things to happen. Transition from puck carrier to pass support, checking the puck carrier to covering away from the puck happen very quickly. The puck carrier must use pivoting, escape moves and puck protection skills to pass on the forehand and everyone must face the puck and give a target.

Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits.
In this game the rule is that you can only pass on the forehand. If a player does a back hand pass the other team gets the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005184904487

8’
2 vs 4 and 1-3
D4 Two Pass Regroup with Jokers Below the Goal Line and Escape Moves Required before passing.


Key Points:


This transition game requires on ice awareness and constant switching between game playing roles as well as loose puck situations. Escape moves create time and space for the player. The puck carrier must slide backward, sideways, tight turn etc.

Description:

Rules: You must regroup with a Joker to go on offense. Before passing or shooting you must make an escape move. Jokers battle jokers but must stay behind the line. Two passes must be made before scoring.

Game One:
Transition to offense requires the player must regroup with the player below the goal line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005152420831

8’
3 vs 4 and 1 vs 2


Two second game with goals only on one timers.

This is a game that the Finnish U17 played last Christmas morning on the outdoor ice near my house. It requires close support, facing the play and quick thinking.







Blue Practice Plan 30-09-14

Posted on: October 01 2014 @ 02:47 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 30-09-14 Time: 19:00-20:00 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Regroups, fill lanes, middle drive, Penalty Kill 3-5 vs. spread.


8’
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:

3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass fromthe other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3 lanes and shoot.

Description:

1. Start with a pass 2 to 1 then 3 to 2 etc..
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
c. skate backward.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

10’ First Alex play D then 1 D then 2 D and hinge. Alex don’t pass unless a F on boards, in middle and far lane facing the puck.
B6 3-0 Weave With D Regroup

Key Points:

-Skate with the puck to the big ice between the dots and then pass.
- Pass and follow your pass.
-Stay wide until you get the pass.

Description:

1. Half the forwards at each end in three lines behind the goal line with the D waiting at the
bluelines. Whites at one end and Blues at the other.
2. Middle player start by skating toward the strong side and pass to the wing and follow the pass
skating behind the new puck carrier.
3. Wing skate to the big ice between the dots and pass to the far wing then follow the pass.
4. Wide wing skate to the big ice and pass to the original centre who is now in the opposite wide
lane.
5. The D is skating backwards thru the middle zone and the puck is passed back to him for a
regroup the other direction.
6. On regroup one player supports on the strong side boards, one mirrors the puck in the middle
lane and one is in the wide lane.
7. D makes the pass and follow the attack into the zone.
8. The group at the other end leaves after the D passes up ice.

12’- Rule is you must regroup before crossing the offensive blue line.

D100 3 on 3 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench


Key Points:

Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on the whistle or on their own.
Pass back to the goalie when changing on the whistle.

Description:

1. Play from 1-1 to 6-5.
2. Change of the whistle or players change on the go.
3. Keep score.
4. If no face-offs then scoring team touch the red line before checking.

15’ Go over in the dressing room before with the magnetic three dimensional board.
T4 D400 - PK 3-5 vs. a Spread PP

Key Points:


The key is to eliminate one timer shots from the point, from the player in the middle and the back door play.

Description:


1. When the puck is passed down the D in front moves to that side. 2. Weak side high player drop low to take away back door one timer.
3. Strong side high player drop down and front the middle attacker. 4. Strong side high player get in shooting lane when puck is at the point.
5. Weak side high player cover middle and take away cross ice pass with stick.
6. Low player eliminate tip ins in front but don't get tied up.
7. D to D pass everyone shift. (Right low player in last minute doesn't move out and back and many openings are created. Important to skate in straight lines from the net out to low, middle, high spots)

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130919153350791

6’
D200 3-3 with 3-2-1 Pucks


Key Points:

-Players can only shoot when the goalie is ready.
-No empty net goals.
-Situation continually changes as goals are scored and players have to read odd and even man numbers.

Description:

1. Players line up outside the blue lines.
2. Coach shoots in 3 pucks.
3. Players race for pucks and battle to score and defend.
4. Leave puck in the net after a goal and play with 2 pucks then 1 puck.
5. Pass pucks remaining to teammates on whistle.
4. Hustle out of the zone on the whistle and play 20-30 seconds only.
6. Count the pucks in the net after to determine the winning team.
*Option is to pass to teammates on the blue line. Another option is to skate behind the nets to start.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005185636266

6’
D200 Multiple Jokers Each Side Key Points:


Key Points:

Practice the 4 Game Playing Roles.

1 - Player with the puck.
2 - Player supporting the puck carrier.
3 - Player checking the puck carrier.
4 - Player covering away from the puck.

Description:

1. Play from 1-1 to 5-5.
2. Passes to the jokers on the side are allowed.
3. Jokers may pass or shoot.
4. Pass to a Joker on the whistle.
5. New players skate behind their net on a change.
6. Variations:
a. Send out uneven teams.
b. Give and go with a Joker who can join the game to either even the teams or add up to a designated number of players.
7. Keep score and use short shifts.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20130111153615671

5’
E1 D200 Shootout Game


Key Points:

As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.

Description:

1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126

*have them defend the net farthest away, not like in the video.






Blue Practice Plan 01-10-14

Posted on: October 02 2014 @ 02:57 AM
By: TomM

Content:

We had another practice tonight. I was on my own. My asst. have missed too much school and work because we have gone every day for a long time and couldn't make it and a coach I asked to help didn't get out of his doctor appointment in time to get to practice. I didn't do anything new but reviewed angling, dside, offensive 2-1, etc. It was only 60 minutes so I didn't want to waste time teaching new drills. I went over everything in the dressing room before practice which helped.I didn't get the Swedish angling drill done so will do it tomorrow. Former NHL player/coach Rich Preston is going to come on the ice to help me with practice tomorrow. He is terrific along the boards protecting the puck and I have asked him to show my players some technique and do a drill to practice it.
----------------------------------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 01-10-14 Time: 17:30-18:30 Venue: SP

Notes:

Angling, 1-1, 2-1, 2-1, passing

8’
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe


Key Points:

This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your
top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.

Description:

1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle
lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a
trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

10’ Defenders stick upside down until the first shot. Pat give some points on playing a defensive 1-1.

C3 Reijo 1-1 Both Sides - Gap Control

Key Points:

The defender needs to get within a sticklength of the attacker before the blueline. Attacker should try moves, dekes, fakes, change of pace, shooting beside the D's foot. Both F's and D's should take turns defending and attacking.

Description:

1. Attacker and defender both skate from the middle back to their blueline.
2. Attacker turns and goes 1-1 vs defender.
3. Done on both sides of the ice alternating direction.
4. Could do 2-1, 1-2, 2-2.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823122856482


12’ All player play F and D and play situations up to 2-2

DT100 Total Hockey: Continuous 1-1 to a 3-2

Key Points:

The support can be either passive or active.
Once the new players are in the neutral zone the original players go back to line, unless a regroup is added.

Description:

1. DT100 formation along the boards in the nzone.
2. Start with a 1-1 and when the puck crosses the blue line each player gets support from the lineup on the boards.
3. Various situation up to a 3-2. i.e. A 2-1 thru the nzone with the defender getting 2 and attacker 1supporting player makes a 2-1 in nzone and 3-3 at each end.
Change the supporting players to create various situations.
Players learn to play in all situations offensive and defensive situations.
The game can also be played using designated positions.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/admin.php?mode=mediaedit&s=1&album_id=7&mid=20090726085540163

8’ White one end and Blue other end. STICK ON PUCK AND BODY ON BODY

B5 - Angling Along the Boards – Sw Didn't do - Do it tomorrow.

Key Points:

Approach the puck carrier from slightly behind angling toward the back of the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck and body on body. Skate through the hands with the inside leg in front and pick up the loose puck.

Description:

1 - Players line up just outside the blue line near the dots, puck are in each corner. 2 - F1 leaves and picks up a puck in the corner then skates up the wide lane. 3 - F2 follows from slightly behind and steers F1 along the boards. 4 - F2 approaches at the back shoulder with 'body on body and stick on the puck.' 5 - F2 angle checks F1 with the inside leg in front then picks up the loose puck. 6 - F2 skates into the slot and shoot - rebounds. 7 - F2 picks up a puck from the opposite corner and F3 becomes the checker.

* Repeat alternating sides.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140625103708719

8’
C2 Angling 2-1 Wally


Key Points:


Defender create an angle from inside to cut the ice in half, deflect the play wide, angle at the back of the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck and finish. Second checker mirror from a little behind.

Description:

1. Coach shoot the puck across the ice on the attacking teams half or dump it softly.
2. Red 1 race for the puck and attack the Blue net.
3. Blue 1 and 2 tag up at the blue line then arc slightly behind the puck carrier to cut the ice in half.
4. Blue 1 close the gap approaching toward the back shoulder with body on body and stick on the puck.
5. Blue 1 rub out Red 1 and Blue 2 pick up the puck.
6. Blue 1 and 2 attack the other way while Red 1 back checks.
7. Repeat with Blue 3 on offense vs. Red 1-2.
* This can also be done as a 1-1 drill to teach the concepts of angling - deflect-steer-angle-finish with body on body and stick on the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130902174459633

6’
D200 Angling Game


Key Points:

Checkers create an angle on puck carrier and take away their time and space with body on body and stick on the puck.

Description:

1. D200 lineup outside blue line.
2. On whistle carry the puck behind the net and checkers leave and create good angles.
3. Play 20-30 seconds.
4. Puck carrier can try to come out short side.
5. Keep score. Play to a certain score and losing team do something like push ups. Play a short series.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005185904685

6’
D200 Straight on Angling Game


Key Points:

Both teams go behind their net on the whistle.
Defenders close the gap and maintain the defensive side.

Description:


1. Teams are lined up behind blue line.
2. On the whistle each team skates behind their net.
3. Attackers try to score and defenders gain a tight gap and D side.
4. Play a cross ice game for 20-30"
5. On whistle pass to coach and the other team is on offense first.
6. Play from 1-1 to 3-3 also using odd man situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111005190114923






Blue Practice Plan 02-10-14

Posted on: October 02 2014 @ 03:14 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Last practice before we play a high skill team on Saturday. The 'stick on puck body on body' individual defensive skill has helped us to be the least penalized team and creates lots of turn-overs. It makes it very difficult for players who never pass to be effective against us.
-----------------------------------------------------------
Blue Practice Plan 02-10-14 Time: 16:00-17:00 Venue: Max Bell 2

Theme of practice.

Protecting the puck and winning battles on Boards. Rich Preston
Passing, timing, angling, stick on puck, Angling on boards




7’
B6 Pass and Replace x 3


Key Points:

Pass while skating then turn and face the player who is passing to you. Shoot before the hash marks and follow the shot for a rebound.

Description:

A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass and turn and face 5 for a pass.
B. 2 pass to 3 and follow the pass.
C. 3 pass to 4 and follow the pass.
D. 4 skate in and shoot-rebound- go to the corner.
# Do 2 or 3 minutes from each side. Alternate task by requiring backhand or saucer passes or a move before passing , etc.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110413082013321

8’
B600 - Regroup with D 2-0 x 2 – Detroit


Key Points:

No need for whistles as the players can see when to start. Face the puck, pass hard, give targets, shoot and follow the shot and stop at the net.

Description:

1. Forwards and defense leave from diagonal four blue lines.
2. F1 at each end pass back to D1 and mirror D1.
3. D1 skate across and pass up the far wing to F2.
4. F1 and F2 attack the net from both ends.
5. Start at the other diagonal blue lines and F3 pass to D2.
6. F3 mirror D2 across the ice and attack 2-0 with F4.
7. Keep this rhythm alternating sides.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014100209062168

7’

Puck protection demo and explanation. Rich Preston.


8’

Rich: puck protection drill.


7’ Two groups.
B5 - Neutral zone Angling


Key Points:

Mirror the attacker from behind. Keep the attacker on the outside, approach toward the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck, shoulder in front and body on body.

Description:

1. Line up in the neutral zone with a defender following an offensive player with the puck.
2. Offensive player make moves and dekes and then turn either way to attack.
3. Defender mirror the offensive player and turn staying on the inside.
4. Defender close the gap by approaching from about a half stick behind at the inside shoulder.
5. Defender keep the stick on the puck and body on body to angle the attacker and take the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131101142929311

7’ two groups
B5 - Angling Along the Boards – Sw


Key Points:

Approach the puck carrier from slightly behind angling toward the back of the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck and body on body. Skate through the hands with the inside leg in front and pick up the loose puck.

Description:

1 - Players line up just outside the blue line near the dots, puck are in each corner. 2 - F1 leaves and picks up a puck in the corner then skates up the wide lane. 3 - F2 follows from slightly behind and steers F1 along the boards. 4 - F2 approaches at the back shoulder with 'body on body and stick on the puck.' 5 - F2 angle checks F1 with the inside leg in front then picks up the loose puck. 6 - F2 skates into the slot and shoot - rebounds. 7 - F2 picks up a puck from the opposite corner and F3 becomes the checker.

* Repeat alternating sides.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140625103708719

7’
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support


Key Points:

Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out, switching, all from the defensive side.

Description:

1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second. Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243

9’
E1 Gambling Shootout


Key Points:

Simulate a real shootout by placing the puck on the dot and the player starting on the whistle and the goalie not moving until the player touches the puck. Get the goalie used to shootout skating.

Description:

1. One player at a time shoots.
2. Simulate a real shootout with the same rules.
3. Players bet and go to one side if they think a goal will be scored and the other side if they think save.
4. Players who bet wrong must skate across and back.
5. Alternate ends.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111004080315971


Blue Practice Plan 05-10-14

Posted on: October 05 2014 @ 03:06 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 05-10-14 Time: 13:45-14:45 Venue: Southland

Notes:
Skating technique, 1-1 defensive skating Cycle, low zone coverage, screen, tip

15’ x 2
Gaston skating with half the team at one end. Switch groups at 15 minutes.


7’
B6 Point Shots


Key Points:

Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.

Description:

Option One

a. One pass to two and then screen goalie.
b. Two drag and shoot.
c. One go to point for a shot then opposite corner.
d. Three pass to four then screen goalie.
e. Four drag and shoot.

Option Two
f. Two stay at the mid point and get a pass from four and shoot before rotating.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462


8’ DT400 3-3 Krusel Battling Game - ProW

Jim talk to players about the cycle, screen etc. on the attack and Alex to the defenders on low zone coverage.

Key Points:

Battle for loose pucks, screen the goalie, shot passes, cycle, man on man, tie up sticks, tip, low zone play.

Description:

1. Line up with the face-off dots and 1 to 3 players race for a loose puck on the whistle.
2. Pass to the point to transition to offense.
3. Point player must shoot or pass within 2 seconds.
4. If a point pass goes out the other pointman gets the puck.
5. Either leave the puck in the zone or pass to the coach on a whistle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131008150727357

30’

Gaston defensive skating for full ice 1-1 with all the players.



Learning v Performance & Challenging Traditional Coaching

Posted on: October 06 2014 @ 07:45 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is a great article on effective skill development.

Learning v Performance & Challenging Traditional Coaching

Posted on 1st June, 2014 by Mark Upton

Email

The text below is a section from an email exchange I had with someone a while back. I thought it might be relevant (even thought-provoking?) for others to read. As always, feedback welcome!


The thing I would like to address from the Skill Acquisition field, is distinguishing between “performance” and “learning”.


It seems many coaches have a mindset that practice activities/drills must contain a high level of success and mistakes are “bad”. So to achieve this, it is only natural that activities and drills are used that almost ensure that players have a high level of success (and lots of “blocked” repetition too). In this case the players “performance” in a drill could be very good – and coaches are interpreting that as “learning” that will translate into match conditions. This is flawed and hence leads us to the notion of “pseudocoaching” (a term brought to prominence by @innovatefc).


Digging deeper into “learning” - you cannot directly measure or observe learning per se (although advances in neuroscience may change that in the future by telling us how the brain is changing based on long-term exposure to different kinds of practice activities). Instead it can be inferred by 2 principles – “retention” and “transfer”.


Retention is concerned with how well I can perform a task some time after an exposure to practicing that task. For example, I do a drill working on receiving and controlling the ball. Towards the end of the drill I successfully control the ball 90% of the time, but what is really important is how well I can control the ball 1 week later. So 1 week later I do a “retention” test where I have 5 reps of trying to control the ball. Suddenly I can only successfully control 2, so 40% success. This is the idea of retention – how do we best design practices that result in a higher retention rate. What research tells us is that if practice tasks of controlling the ball were done in a more variable way (ie not all to feet but using different parts of the body, different length/speed/trajectories of passes), or even interspersed with other skills, is that retention rates will be higher. So whilst my performance in practice might be less because I am having to deal with more variability (my success rate might drop to 70%), in the retention test 1 week later my success rate will be higher, say 60%. This is obviously a paradox – lower performance in practice (90% v 70%) can result in higher retention rates (40% v 60%). So it is this retention rate that we should be focusing on.


The 2nd principle is “transfer” – how well does my performance in a practice task transfer to performing tasks required of me in a “real match”? Most skills in a range of human performance domains rely on practice tasks being “representative” (similar) to “real” tasks for high rates of transfer to occur. As I have tweeted/blogged about many times, this brings in the saying…


“transfer from practice to match conditions depends on the extent to which practice resembles those match conditions”

In essence humans get good at the tasks they do – evolution didn’t really have in mind doing one task to get good at doing another task! For example, dribbling around cones a lot will help us get better at dribbling around cones, not necessarily dribbling around a “live” defender. If we want to get good at the task of beating a defender, practice tasks where you are required to beat a defender! Where this principle of transfer is most violated is in the separation of ‘technique” from “perception” and decision making. Coming back to the coaches mindset of needing success in drills, incorporating decision making (via introducing opposition for example) does not align with it – “those damn defenders keep stuffing up my drill!”. As a consequence of this mindset, far too many drills are used that remove the decision making component. But now we are doing a task that is different from that required in a match, hence transfer is reduced. Reduced transfer = reduced learning (assuming our objective is learning of skills for the match environment).


So when talking about long-term player development, a major focus needs to be learning, rather than short-term performance in a drill (although there is a place for that still – depending on the individual player and their needs, and the psychological aspects like confidence and self-belief. These things need to be taken into account still).


Hope all that makes some sense?


Other evidence from the Skill Acquisition field also challenges the notion of high levels of prescriptive instruction & feedback from coaches. There is also an increasing awareness of the important role that movement variability plays when learning a skill – this is particularly important for young players. Rather than trying to drill/instruct a “textbook” technique/movement, it is potentially better to let players “explore” subtle variations in a technique/movement to find one that is best suited to them and “feels right”. Allowing young players this “exploration” can ultimately lead to development of a high level of stability AND adaptability in the technique/movement. In a dynamic game such as soccer, this is the ultimate mix that the best players possess.


So with some of the above Skill Acquisition theory in mind, I’m sure you can see a conflict – primarily that the research/evidence either refutes, or at least questions, many of the “traditional” coaching methods. This is not restricted to soccer either by the way. All team sports seem to have the same “traditions” and even Martial Arts (here is a recent blog post written on Martial Arts teaching & learning – it outlines exactly the issues I see in team sports).


Why have these traditional methods not been challenged? Well largely because coaches fall back on tradition and the “passing down” of knowledge/methods between coaches. This has been occurring for so many decades that it has become an unbelievably powerful socio-cultural force (and there are positives to come from that dynamic). Other reasons that Skill Acquisition and evidence-based methods have struggled to make an impact could be….



practice design is “core business” for coaches – not as likely to hand over/collaborate with specialists like other Sport Science disciplines

coaches usually lack a science/pedagogy background

Skill Acquisition is often absent in Coach Education

challenging to understand & apply principles within context of “real-world” practice sessions – need mentoring, hard to up-skill coaches at one-off workshops

perceptual-cognitive skill (decision making, anticipation) was long thought of as genetic or “natural talent” that could not be enhanced by practice

lag in being able to evaluate effectiveness of certain approaches used in practice (long-term nature of acquiring skill)

need more robust research (longitudinal, sport-specific)



Mark Upton holds the role of Coaching Science Manager at the English Institute of Sport. He has extensive experience applying Skill Acquisition and learning principles in the design of on and off field environments for player development. If you would like to discuss the consultancy and mentoring services Mark offers, please get in touch -

mark at sportsrelations com au

…or on twitter @uppy01

…or LinkedIn

This entry was posted in Coaching Science, Skill Acquisition by Mark Upton. Bookmark the permalink.


Blue Practice Plan 09-10-14

Posted on: October 09 2014 @ 07:11 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan Date: 09-10-14 Time: 17:30-18:30 Venue: George Blunden

Notes:

Face the puck, give a target, escape moves Go to the net, pass on the rush, 1-1 battles
Become a 270 degree player, puck handle Fake shots




10’
Russian Warm up with Shots


Yursinov Progression to Ovechkin move.

1. Fake the slapshot with a convincing fake and finish with the stick hitting the ice.
2. Fake the slapshot and accelerate around the defender on the forehand.
3. Fake the slapshot and move like you are going around on the forehand but quickly pull the puck across to the backhand.
4. Fake a backhand pass or shot and rotate the body in a convincing manner.
5. Fake the backhand and pull the puck across to the forehand.
6. Fake the slapshot and pull the puck to the backhand, fake a backhand and pull the puck to the forehand.
7. Fake a wrist shot and spin on the backhand.
8. Fake a wrist shot and spin to the forehand.
9. Fake a backhand shot-across to the forehand then fake a wrist shot and across to the backhand.
10. Combine the moves.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130321101649551

8’
B6 Shots


1- turn inside
2- turn outside
3- third shot wrap around.
4- Start 1-0 then 2-0


6’ 3 on 3 and 4 on 4

D4
One zone game with the rule that everyone must always face the puck and give a target.

6’ 3-3 and 4-4

D4

One zone game with the rule that everyone must touch the puck before scoring but ONLY FOREHAND PASSES can be used.

10’
D1
Full ice game. Everyone plays.



Rule there must be at least ONE PASS MADE IN EVERY ZONE AND GOALS CAN ONLY BE SCORED ON ONE TOUCH SHOTS.

10’
D100 Two 1 on 1 Games at Once


Key Points:

One coach should watch that the players won’t collide. It is important to look behind and for the player with the puck to skate away from oncoming players. This is a great game for 1-1 and conditioning.

Description:

1. Players line up along the boards one group on each side of the red stripe.
2. One player of each team leave every 15”.
3. Coach blow whistle each 15” and players play for 2 whistles (30”)
4. Pass to a teammate when the second whistle blows.
5. Only two pucks on the ice and get the puck out of the net after a goal.
6. After scoring touch the red line before defending.
7. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719153346728

10’
E1 Two Goal Relay Race


Key Points:


Work on shooting one timers and scoring on rebounds. Good habits like face the puck, give a target with the stick on the ice. Limit of 2 passes before each shot.

Description:

A. 1 and 2 attack 2-0 on opposite net.
B. Pass and shoot to score.
C. Get a new puck from 3 or 4 after scoring.
D. Score a second goal.
E. After the second goal race back to the blueline and touch 3 or 4 with stick on shin pad.
F. Team to score most goals in certain time wins.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120914084920694

This is the same game but the nets are cross ice instead of at the blue line. Bnefit is that the wide shots stay in play.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130111093614490
--------------------------------------------------------
This was a very good practice. The focus is on good habits and how to 'play the game.' My players who were injured the first tournament game a month a go were there. The boy with the broken collarbone skated for the first time and did the warm up and shootout. The boy with the injured spine watched and his MRI showed no structural damage to his neck. He was leaking fluid from his spinal cord and he needs four more weeks before coming on the ice.

We were 3-1-2 in six pre season games and are 2-2 in the league so far. We could have won all five but we do a lot of high risk plays in our end and that causes goals against that shouldn't happen. So if we clean up these things and get everyone used to the pace we will be ok. Only 2 of our players played this level before so we are still adjusting. Good habits like facing the puck always, stick on the ice on both offense and defense, defensive side, get to the big ice between the dots, and come back deep on defense and go to the net on offense will make us a top level team.

It is a process to teach young boy's how to play.


Blue Practice Plan 11-10-14

Posted on: October 11 2014 @ 01:10 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 11-10-14 Time: 13:00-14:00 Venue: Max Bell

Notes:

Terry Johnson (former NHL defenseman and university coach) breakout skills and reads. Forwards offensive skills individual and team. Stick on puck, escape moves, drive the net
Pass while moving, good habits, quick Attack,

6’
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot


Key Points:

This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.

Description:

1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281


6’
B202 Passing Overspeed


Key Points:

Always face the puck and make as many passes as possible. On the whistle pass early to the player below the goal line. Hit the net and look for the rebound from the second shooter. Give a target.

Description:

1. Two red and two blue leave from the line.
2. Make as many passes as possible in 7".
3. On the whistle player with the puck give and go with a player below the goal line and shoot.
4. Second player get a pass from the side then give and go low and shoot.
5. On the same whistle two new players from each colour leave from the line.
6. After the shot become a passer near the net.
7. Low passers return to the line up.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104080332117

20’ TJ and Alex with D. Tom and Jim with F’s for 20’

B Skills Warm up Finnish U17


Key Points:

This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on technique and rebound control.

Description

A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.
B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone. First 10’
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - #8 around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.
C. Goalies work with coach at one end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140131221040649

6’ Forwards while D does BO.
B500 Cut Backs and Escape Moves


Key Points:

Protect the puck with the body on offense. Cut back turning toward the boards. Defender stay lined up with the back of the inside shoulder and stick on the puck.

Description:

1. Leave on the whistle and practice cut backs, tight turns. Go to the net on the second whistle while the next players leave.
2. Two players leave and the second player stays on the D side with the stick on the puck and gives passive resistance.
3. This is a battle and the defender tries to get the puck. On the second whistle whoever has the puck go to the net.

*Without goalies both sides can go at once and with a goalie alternate sides. Players switch sides after doing both offense and defense.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011041612155482

7’ Forwards while D does BO.
DT400 Game of Quick Transition


Key Points:

The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.

Description:

1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Up to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack.
5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

15’ TJ and Alex with Defense
T1-2 - Breakout Options – Wheel, Go, Counter


Key Points:
Principles for the Wheel, Go and Counter, with Terry Johnson a former NHL Defenseman. The key is skating hard to force the checker to commit and then choosing the option.

Description:

1. Coach shoot the puck in and the D skate to the puck and then at a 45 degree angle to force the checker to cross over.
2. Wheel behind the net, cut up near the far post and pass to the point for a shot on net.
3. Critical point is to make the checker do what you want them to. If you skate to where you are going to pass first then the checker can get a good angle and steal the puck.
4. Go by skating hard one way and then tight turn away from pressure. Pass to the point for a shot.
5. Counter when the checker doesn’t chase behind the net.
6. Coach shoots the puck in and the player drive skates behind the net and then tight turns to come back the original way.
7. Pass to the wing who skates out and passes across to the point for a shot on net.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131107182728398

5’ Everyone with TJ and Alex
B T1-2 Tight Turn-Quick up 2-0 –TJ


Key Points:

The key is to drive skate at a 45 degree angle toward the net and then do a tight turn to the outside when the forward crosses over.

Description:

1. Coach pass to D1.
2. D1 drive skate at 45 degree angle to net and the coach pressure from the inside.
3. D1 tight turn outside and pass to F1 on the boards.
4. F1 pass across to F2 and they attack 2-0.
5. Repeat with the coach passing to F2 on the other side.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2013110917373833

5’ Everyone with TJ and Alex
B T1-2 D to D and Up - 2-0 – TJ


Key Points:

The key is to drive skate at a 45 degree angle toward the net and then do a tight turn to the outside when the forward crosses over. Read the forecheck which is the best play.

Description:

1. Coach pass to D1.
2. D1 drive skate at 45 degree angle to net and the coach pressure from the inside.
3. D1 pass across to D2 who hinges behind.
4. D2 pass to F2 who passes across to F1 and they attack 2-0.
5. Repeat with the coach passing to F2 on the other side.
6. Add the D read the play and either tight turn outside and pass up if D2 is covered or pass D to D.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131110154102162

5’ B T1-2 Breakout D to D 5-0 – TJ

Key Points:

Both D join the attack to make it 5-0.Centre must mirror the D from the middle skating parallel and give a target. Stay behind the D so he can skate into the puck. D must drive skate when they get the puck.

Description:

1. Coach pass to D1 who drive skates at a 45 degree angle to the net.
2. D1 pass across to D2 who hinges up ice.
3. D2 pass to the C.
4. Forwards attack 3-0 at the far end.
5. Add D1 to D2 back to D1.
6. Add coach cover one of the D so they either go D to D or tight turn and up to the wing.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131111154200960

7’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 3-0 Regroup 2-1 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. One forward support on the boards and the other from the middle. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:
1. F1 or F2 dump the puck in and D1 skate back for the puck.
2. D2 follow the play.
3. D1 make a breakout pass to F1 or F2 and follow.
4. F1 and F2 regroup with D2 in the neutral zone.
5. F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1.
6. F3 or F4 dump the puck into the far end and D2 skate back for the puck-pass to F3-F4.
7. F3 and F4 regroup with D3 in the neutral zone and attack 2-1 vs. D3.

• Continue this flow.

• Vary the number of F from 1 to 3 and use either 1 or 2 D to create more game recognition situations.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093348590

6’
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Key Points:

The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:

1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

We didn't do the last two drills but instead continued with the breakouts and added 5-0 from deep in the zone. TJ worked so hard forcing the D on every breakout. Barclay Plager coached him in St. Louis and would always tell the D that 'forwards are so stupid they will go wherever you take them.' That is why the first strides are at a 45 degree angle towards your net. This causes the forward to cross-over and deny the middle. When he does this you tight turn the other way and beat the first forechecker. I think our forwards are catching on to the middle drive. Whoever is second over the blue line goes to the net and not just the middle guy. He can easily fill the wide lane. Also funneling back to the slot until you are sure your team will get the loose puck instead of just skating along the boards for a reakout pass.


Blue Practice Plan 12-10-14

Posted on: October 12 2014 @ 04:16 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 12-10-14 Time: 13:45-14:45 Venue: Southland

Notes:

Regroup, 2-1, 3-2, power play, forecheck Penalty kill
Skate to the big ice




7’

C1-B4, 2-0 Skate Inside and Pass Outside


Key Points

Skate to the big ice between the dots with the puck and pass to the outside. Pass and follow the pass taking the ice behind.

Description:

1. Line up in the C1 formation at the bluelines.
2. Two players leave from the front of each line and get a puck from the corner.
3. The first player skate inside the dot with the puck and pass to the second player on the outside.
4. First player follow the pass and cross ‘taking the ice behind.’
5. The second player receive the pass and skate between the dots.
6. The second player now passes wide to the first player and follows the pass.
7. Shoot and rebound after one pass in the offensive zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221221695


7’ Alex and Jim dump and forecheck one end each.
C3 - Dump-Breakout 3-0 Regroup 2-1 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. One forward support on the boards and the other from the middle. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1 or F2 dump the puck in and D1 skate back for the puck.
2. D2 follow the play.
3. D1 make a breakout pass to F1 or F2 and follow.
4. F1 and F2 regroup with D2 in the neutral zone.
5. F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1.
6. F3 or F4 dump the puck into the far end and D2 skate back for the puck-pass to F3-F4.
7. F3 and F4 regroup with D3 in the neutral zone and attack 2-1 vs. D3.

• Continue this flow.


• Vary the number of F from 1 to 3 and use either 1 or 2 D to create more game recognition situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093348590

6’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 5-0-Regroup-3-2 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. Forwards support on the boards middle and far wing. D practice D to D options and hinges as well as quick ups. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1, F2 or F3 dump the puck in and D1 and D2 skate back for the puck.
2. D3 and D4 follow the play.
3. D1 or D2 make a breakout pass to F1, F2 or F3 and follow up ice.
4. Forwards regroup with D3 and D4 in the neutral zone.
5. F1-F2-F3 attack 3-2 vs. D1-D2.
6. F4-F5-F6 dump the puck into the far end and D3-D4 skate back for the puck and breakout.
7. F4-F5-F6 regroup with D5-D6 in the neutral zone and attack 3-2 vs. D3-D4.

• Continue this flow.

• Instead of the first regroup D3 or D4 could dump the puck in the other corner and D1-D2 break out again before the regroup and 3-2.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093349684

15’

Each group on pp for 5’ two groups at far end review of forecheck.

T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation


Key Points:

Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give.
Jim pp and Alex/Jim forecheck.



12’ 6’ on 5-5 and 6’ on pp/pk
TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage


Key Points:

Rotation is Attack-Defend-Rest. Number the players so they know when to not defend. In even numbered situations you can require the defenders to breakout into the neutral zone before passing.

Description:

1. Power play attack vs 2 Fand 2 D.
2. Defenders ice the puck and rest.
3. Group waithing at far blue attack.
4. Original attackers now defend 1 short.
5. Goalies rotate in.
6. Create any situation by changing the number of attackers or defenders.
7. Even strength can also be practiced.

*Option is to have waiting players breakout from behind the goal line and do a pk forecheck.

7’
D400 The Best Player Win Game


Key Points:

-Battle hard for the puck.
-Protect the puck.
-Get a shot and fight for the Rebound.

Description:

1. Players line up outside the blueline. They can be in 3 teams and keep score or just everyone vs
everyone.
2. Coach fires the puck in and whoever gets the puck tried to score vs the other two.
3. If another player gets the puck he tries to score; including rebounds.
4. On whistle pass back to the coach and race out.
5. 20-30 second shifts.

7’
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout


Key Points

Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes.

Description:

1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.
*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595

--------------------------------------------
We didn't get the 1-1-1 game done but instead spent more time on the 3 team game to practice the forecheck, breakout vs. pressure and the power play. I will include that game, speed scoring and whatever else we missed the last two ice sessions in our next practice. We play Tuesday and only have a Thursday practice before our Sat. game.







Blue Practice Plan 16-10-14

Posted on: October 13 2014 @ 07:18 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is an early practice plan. I want to do the drills and games we didn't get done the last two practices. Team play always takes longer than you plan and I asked TJ to do the 5-0 breakout. We will review the sequence as it takes about 3 times through before it transfers well to a game. We will focus on battles in the slot and contests this session. Backchecking and tying up sticks are two skills that win games.
---------------------------------------
Blue Practice Plan 16-10-14 Time: 16:00-17:15 Venue: George Blunden

Notes:

Battles, take sticks, back check, identify Coverage, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 3-2, 3-3, game
Situations, passing, breakout reads, Puck handling


10’ Jim A200 with a shot.

A200 Big Moves _ Russian Warm-up - Finish with a Shot

Key Points:

Increase the size of the moves by reaching as far as possible with the puck. Separate the movement of the upper and lower body by skating away from the puck. Players must be able to handle the puck under control around and through their body.

Description:

- Skate away from the puck. Skate right reach left and skate left and reach right. - Reach as far forward and back as you can using the top hand.
-Put the puck from the stick to inside and outside edges back to the stick.
-Move puck from behind to front through skate forehand and backhand.
-Escape moves backward with the puck and tight turns each way.
-Fake a shot and go left then right. Spin on backhand.
-Touch each knee while skating. - Yo-yo the puck give it and take it away. - Toe drag fake inside and pull the puck back while sliding back. - Bring the puck from behind to in front through the skates on forehand. - Bring the puck from behind to in front through the skates on backhand. - Skate fake inside and go outside.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722140651119

10’ Jim with F, Alex with D, JF with G

B Skills Warm up Finnish U17

Key Points:

This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on technique and rebound control.

Description

A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.
B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - #8 around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.
C. Goalies work with coach at one end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140131221040649

8’
D400 The Best Player Win Game


Key Points:

-Battle hard for the puck.
-Protect the puck.
-Get a shot and fight for the Rebound.

Description:

1. Players line up outside the blueline. They can be in 3 teams and keep score or just everyone vs. everyone.
2. Coach fires the puck in and whoever gets the puck tried to score vs the other two.
3. If another player gets the puck he tries to score; including rebounds.
4. On whistle pass back to the coach and race out.
5. 20-30 second shifts.

10’
DT400 Kibyuk Small and Smaller Area Games at Once


Key Points:

Set one net up on the goal line below the face-off dot facing up ice and the other net facing the corner just inside the circle. The game is continuous and thecoach shoot in a new puck on a goal.

Description:

A. Blue 1 and 2 attack Red 1 and 2 in the corner and Blue 3 and 4 attack Red 3 and 4 from the red line.
B. Coach whistles and Red 1 and 2 carry the puck out to the red line and attack the other net vs. Blue 3 and 4.
C. Coach shoots in a new puck and Red 5 and 6 attack vs. Blue 1 and 2 in the corner. Red 3 and 4 return to the line.
Option: Vary the number of players from 1 to 3 and switch up who starts on offense half way through the game.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121012034957748

9’
DT 400 Two Net Game - Joker at Point


Key Points:

Players constantly transition from offense to defense and defense to offense. They must fight to get on the defensive side.

Description:

1. Start with the players racing for a puck dumped in by the coach.
2. To be on offense the team must pass to the Joker at the point.
3. Joker can pass or shoot but must stay at the point.
4. Players race across to get open on offense or gain defensive side.
5. Players take turn being the joker.

10’
C3 - Continuous 2-0, 2-1, 3-1, 3-2 - Pro


Key Points:

Make plays early - create 2-1's - attack with speed - middle drive. Start 2-0 and shoot at one end, one defenseman follow.
Description:
1. Start 2-0 and one defenseman follow.
2. Attack 2-1 the other way and one defenseman follow.
3. One forward join with a puck and attack 3-1 the other direction, two defensemen follow.
4. Attack 3-2 the other way.
5. Start with a 2-0 with another group.
*Options: Make a contest one colour vs. the other to see who can score the most in a certain time or else D and G vs. F’s and count the goals scored in 8 minutes and next time see if there are more or less goals scored.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140916101410255

10’
DT100 Backchecking Game 2 on 2 then 3 on 3


Key Points:

Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:

I am using the Dukla example. We will only have one game going at once.

DT100 Game with F Backchecking x 2 Dukla

Key Points:


The original attacker backcheck and tie up the attacker stick if there is a shot.
Great game to work on speed in the attack and good defensive habits.

Description:
1. Start by attacking 1-1.
2. New player give passive support above circles.
3. On breakout pass to supporting player while original attacker backcheck.
4.Supporting player can take away the puck if it comes above the circles.
5. Backcheck hard and tie up the stick on rebounds.
7. Battle for loose pucks.
8. Backchecker make sure there is no second shot and goalie clear the rebound.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100821114214589

8’
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Key Points:

The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:

1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227

Team pictures right after practice.
-----------------------------------------
Last game we came out really flat and fell behind 4-1 to a very fast team. We came back and in the third allowed them only 2 shots and ended up with a 4-4 tie. We need to go over the two short pk as we were totally confused and got scored on. We have only worked on 3-5 once and it takes at least 3 times before everyone understands and remembers how to rotate properly, especially 13-14 year old boy's. We put together our 3 forwards who all weigh under 100 lbs. 41 kg. and two are under 5; tall. They are all really fast and have top end skills. They totally dominated the second half of the game and got two of our goals. To do this we had to put a player on his off wing and he really struggled there. So now we have one line with chemistry. The player with a broken collarbone is back on the ice. It is 5 weeks now and he can probably play next week. He is one of our more skilled players who competes really hard and that will give us 10 F. The boy with the injured spine can skate tonight with no contact and is about a month away from playing. MRI has shown no permanent damage.

Yesterday I met with the new Mount Royal University men's team coach, Bert Gilling, he was asst. coach for Bemidji the last 15 years. We had a good talk about his vision for the program. It is nice to listen to someone who wants to connect to the tradition of Mount Royal Hockey which started in 1911. They joined the CIS a couple of years ago and already have established themselves as a top team and have defeated the U of Calgary 3 times already this year. I gave him a flash drive with 1200 short clips of drills and 800 pdf.s. He runs really good practices already.





Blue Practice Plan 19-10-14

Posted on: October 19 2014 @ 02:29 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 19-10-14 Time: 10:15-11:15 + 30 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:

Passing thru neutral zone, one timers Screen, tip, fake shot, skate inside pass outside,
30’ Team Play meeting in dressing room Right after ice time.



8’
C1 2-0 Skate Inside and Pass Outside


Key Points

Skate to the big ice between the dots with the puck and pass to the outside. Pass and follow the pass taking the ice behind.

Description:

1. Line up in the C1 formation at the bluelines.
2. Two players leave from the front of each line and get a puck from the corner.
3. The first player skate inside the dot with the puck and pass to the second player on the outside.
4. First player follow the pass and cross ‘taking the ice behind.’
5. The second player receive the pass and skate between the dots.
6. The second player now passes wide to the first player and follows the pass.
7. Shoot and rebound after one pass in the offensive zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221221695


10’
B6 Breakout 3-0 Point Shot x 2 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense make the pass while skating between the dots up ice. Forwards give a target and do everything while skating.

Description:

1 – D1 at each end skate from the goal line to the top of the circle and back then get a puck.
2 – F1 and F2 leave from the blue line and come back for a breakout pass. F2 mirror the puck across.
3 – D1 pass to either F1 or F2 and D1 follow the rush up the ice.
4 – F take the ‘big ice’ between the dots and then pass wide.
5 – F make a wide zone entry and shoot-rebound.
6 – Non shooting F get a puck from the corner and pass to D1 at the point who drags and shoots.
7 – F who passes either go to the net or cycle high as a passing option for D1.
8 – Repeat with D2-F3-F4 at each end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706163537973

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706215733459

10’
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Quick Up-Detroit


Key Points:

Hinge and push the puck up the ice quickly. Strong side F stretch and weak side give middle support.

Description:

1. F1 skate and regroup with D1.
2. D1 skate to the middle and pass to D2 in the wide lane.
3. D2 quick up to F2 who stretches on the strong side boards.
4. F1 and F2 attack.

Repeat the other way with F3 regrouping with D3.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101128092923497

8’
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2 – Passive Support


Alex and Jim play D.

Key Points:

The two attacking forwards play attack 2 on 2 and then play a low 2-2 vs. the two defenders.

Description:

1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 2 on 2 attack F1 and F2 vs D1 and D2.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 and F2 give passive support from the mid-slot area and attacking team Blue D1 and D2 support F's.
4. Play 2 on 2 low in the zone.
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. The supporting players who joined the play now go 2 on 2 in the other direction.
7. F2 - F3 support D1 and D2 and D3 and D4 support attacking F1 and F2.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706173523451

15’
D100 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench


Rules-at least one pass per zone and one touch goals.
[/color]


Key Points:

Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on their own.
Whistle if no pass is made in the zone. Other team gets the puck.

Description:
1. Play from 5-5.
2. Change on the go.
3. Keep score.
4. Scoring team touch the red line before checking.

9’ Shootout – Keep track of goals.
A500 - Overspeed Puck Handling with a Shot - Sweden 4


Key Points:

Players should skate and make moves at full speed. If they fall sometimes that shows they are pushing themselves beyond their comfort zone, which is great. Always follow the shot for a rebound.

Description:

1. Players are lined up along the boards with one colour on each side of the red line with a net at each blue line.
2. On whistle the players skate with the puck in the neutral zone.
3. Overspeed tempo with moves and turns at a faster pace than the players usually go.
4. Shoot on one net each on the next whistle.
5. Whistle about every 7”.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140506134839311

30’

Team play review with magnetic board in dressing room.

----------------------------------------
Totally dominated 75% of the last game and outshot opponent 36-21 but gave up 3 goals on either high risk plays with the D trying to beat two forecheckers deep in our zone and one where we pinched on the strong side (which we don't do) and everyone ended up near the puck. It hit the refs skate and they got a 3-0 and won the game 3-2 on their only scoring chance in the period.
We have to work on head man the puck instead of carrying it through the neutral zone. The supporting players need to break. Right now many are watching the puck carrier. Great effort, puck possession, etc. Poor decisions.







Blue Practice 21-10-14

Posted on: October 21 2014 @ 04:33 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice 21-10-14

This is a 90' practice with lots of game situations. Focus on puck support, D join the attack, one timers.

I will just post the pdf. for now.

The players were on the ice for a skill session with Hockey Canada instructors and our coaching staff. They did a lot of puck handling. The extra ice time is always a bonus.


Blue Practice Plan 23-10-14

Posted on: October 23 2014 @ 08:52 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 23-10-14 Time: 17:30-18:30 Venue: G Blunden

Notes:
Team play review, one touch scoring, Puck support, pass, puck handling, shooting Power play, forecheck, one touch goals

8'
B5 Cross and Drop Sequence

10’ Jim skills with F. Alex review Hinge and Breakouts.
B Skills Warm up Finnish U17

12’ D100 Full Ice with Extra Players on the Bench
4-4 Scrimmage Rules – Minimum of One Pass Per Zone and One Touch Goals

15’ Jim review pp with Ron helping. Alex Tom review forecheck 5’ each line.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation

8’
TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage

7’
E1 Two Shot Shootout
--------------------------------------------
The defense has had a tough time learning how to hinge, so in the Warm-up section I invented a drill rotation to practice taking the forechecker with you then passing back or up to your partner. Switching sides is an advanced option. I posted a diagram of the drill and I think they caught on. Many of the players have never been taught a lot of the team play concepts that you would assume they know after playing since they were 5 or 6 years old. It seems that the skills are pretty good and with some are excellent by 'how to play the game' is what we have to add to the skill work. I guess if they knew everything then they wouldn't need coaches.

A hockey curriculum with a 'scope and sequence' of skills, habits and team play concepts is needed. Right now they only thing available from the federations is 'how to teach skills', which is great but doesn't develop complete players who have the skill and know where and when to use them.

The ABC program does this but it is basically ignored and that is why I have this site.


Blue Practice Plan 27-10-15

Posted on: October 29 2014 @ 03:02 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 27-10-15 Time: 17:00-18:30 Venue: Max Bell

Themes:
Point shots, back check, shot pass, 2-1, 3-2, 3-0, 5-0, 2-2, 3-3, 4-4, skills


10’
B5 - 3 Give and Go x 3 – Shoot - Rebound


Key Points:

Face the puck all of the time and keep moving in a semi circle with stick on the ice.

Description:

a. 1 exchange passes with 2 from about 5 metres skating in an arc.
b. 3 exchange passes with 4 after the second pass.
c. After 3 passes 1 and 3 shoot.
d. 1 and 3 follow shot and rebound for next shooter.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100820101216223

10’
B6 Chaos 3-0 Pass and Shoot


Key Points:


Give a target, pivot to face the puck all the time; use forehand passes and backhand only when passing forward.

Description:

1. Three players leave from each end.
2. Each group passes one puck in nzone.
3. On the whistle player with the puck shoot.
4. Other two players save ice and get a pass from the corner and shoot. a few seconds apart.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101006084345432

12’
6’
D4 - Goals Must Originate Below Goal Line


Key Points:

Players learn to protect the puck, pass to themselves off the boards or back of the net and use the net for puck protection. Also change the point of attack. Defenders must see the puck and the player they are covering and goalie must look over their shoulder and move side to side.

Description:

1. Play game situations from 1-1 to 5-5.
2. Situations 3 on 3 or less the players must keep the puck below the top of the circles.
3. To start an attack the puck must be moved below the goal line.
4. When the defenders get the puck they have to get it deep below the goal line before they can score.

6’
DT4 Must Pass to Joker at the Point


Key Points

Each team has one or two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers. This is a great game to practice getting the shot through under pressure.
The jokers at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. Low players get open and defenders cover man to man.

Description:

Each team has one or two jokers at the point.

1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012091408474755

13’ 3-0 and 5-0
7’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 3-0 Regroup 2-1 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. One forward support on the boards and the other from the middle. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1 or F2 dump the puck in and D1 skate back for the puck.
2. D2 follow the play.
3. D1 make a breakout pass to F1 or F2 and follow.
4. F1 and F2 regroup with D2 in the neutral zone.
5. F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1.
6. F3 or F4 dump the puck into the far end and D2 skate back for the puck-pass to F3-F4.
7. F3 and F4 regroup with D3 in the neutral zone and attack 2-1 vs. D3.

• Continue this flow.

• Vary the number of F from 1 to 3 and use either 1 or 2 D to create more game recognition situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093348590

6’ Add double D to D passes.
C3 - Dump-Breakout 5-0-Regroup-3-2 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. Forwards support on the boards middle and far wing. D practice D to D options and hinges as well as quick ups. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1, F2 or F3 dump the puck in and D1 and D2 skate back for the puck.
2. D3 and D4 follow the play.
3. D1 or D2 make a breakout pass to F1, F2 or F3 and follow up ice.
4. Forwards regroup with D3 and D4 in the neutral zone.
5. F1-F2-F3 attack 3-2 vs. D1-D2.
6. F4-F5-F6 dump the puck into the far end and D3-D4 skate back for the puck and breakout.
7. F4-F5-F6 regroup with D5-D6 in the neutral zone and attack 3-2 vs. D3-D4.

• Continue this flow.

• Instead of the first regroup D3 or D4 could dump the puck in the other corner and D1-D2 break out again before the regroup and 3-2.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093349684

10’ Add Shot Pass Option
B6 Point Shots


Key Points:

Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.

Description:

Option One

a. One pass to two and then screen goalie.
b. Two drag and shoot.
c. One go to point for a shot then opposite corner.
d. Three pass to four then screen goalie.
e. Four drag and shoot.

Option Two

f. Two stay at the mid point and get a pass from four and shoot before rotating.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462

10’ 2 on 2 and 3 on 3 keep Score
DT100 Transition Game of Support, Defend, Attack, Rest


Key Points:
This is a great full ice transition game to practice offense and defense in all three zones. I have
done this the last 2 practices with my team and my skills group. The coach can decide what to
focus on each time you do it. Instead of stopping the game talk to the players when they come
back to the line. You can do this from 1-1 to a 3-3. I will put a modification that adds other
nuances to the game at another date.
Point men only get one second with the puck to shoot or pass. Defenders cover the low players
and ignore the pointmen.

Description:

A. 1 and 2 attack vs a and b and are supported on the blueline by 3 and 4 The pointmen cannot
go farther than the top of the circle. When the puck goes to the point a and b control te sticks of 1 and 2.
Attackers cycle, screen, tip, drive the net. Defenders work on low coverage and B.O.
B. When a and b breakout over the blueline 1 and 2 are finished and there is a 2 on 2 in the
nzone with a and b attacking 3 and 4.
C. After the puck crosses the blueline c and d support a and b from the point.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111028075900881

10’
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game


Key Points:

Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:

Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

8’
DT400 3-3 Krusel Battling Game- ProW


Key Points:

Battle for loose pucks, screen the goalie, shot passes, cycle, man on man, tie up sticks, tip, low zone play.

Description:

1. Line up with the face-off dots and 1 to 3 players race for a loose puck on the whistle.
2. Pass to the point to transition to offense.
3. Point player must shoot or pass within 2 seconds.
4. If a point pass goes out the other pointman gets the puck.
5. Either leave the puck in the zone or pass to the coach on a whistle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131008150727357

7’
E1 Rebound Game


This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.

Key Points:

Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.

Description:

1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter.
3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed.
5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407





Blue Practice Plan 31-10-14

Posted on: November 01 2014 @ 02:20 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan Date: 31-10-14 Time: 16:30-19:00 Venue: Optimist

Themes:
One hour video session on decision making. 16:30-17:30 Watch game video and the players give a + or a - to decisions with the puck. Do a review of the forecheck on the magnetic board.
Focus on good playing habits. 1-1, 2-1, 2-2 4-4.

10’
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A and B


Key Points
: Chip out over the blue line.

This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice aimlessly.

Description:

- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.

10’
DT 2-4 Gaining Position in the Slot


Key Points:

Offensive players fight for offensive side and to keep their stick free and defensive players fight for defensive side and to control the attackers sticks.

Description:

1. All players are in front of the net in two colours.
2. Start with the coach calling red offense and they try to get open and the blue cover them and control their stick.
3. Progress to 2 coaches at the point. One on each team. When they pass the players change roles O to D and D to O.
4. Play a game where the defenders must pass to their coach at the point to be on offense.
5. Offensive coach can shoot or pass.
5. Everyone stays within the dots and below the top of the circles.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120926091742381

10’
DT400 2 on 2 at Each End - Perry Pearn Game Rotation


Key Points:
Focus on getting the puck out and in.

This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone.

Description:

1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004080131252

We added a 10' controlled 4-4 scrimmage and I stopped the play when high risk decisions were made near the blue lines.


10’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on 1 on each side vs. #2.

*With younger players stagger the start so each corner leaves after the first pass.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

10’
DT100 Continuous 2-1, 2-2 – Detroit


Key Points:

Face the puck. Forwards attack with speed. D stay in the middle and deny F to F pass. Forwards make the first play near the offensive blue line to force the D to make a decision. D delay the play as much as possible.

Description:

1. F1 and F2 attack vs D1.
2. F3 and F4 support D1 as far as the hash marks.
3. D2 support F1 and F2 passively from the point.
4. D1 make a breakout pass to F3 or F4.
5. F3-F4 attack D2 in the other direction.
6. F5 and F6 support D2 and D3 support F3 and F4.
7. Continue this flow.
8. Add a D to make it a 2 on 2.

Options.
We played with active support so F1 followed the play from the line-up in the nzone and backchecked to make the 2-1 a low 2-2 and F2 covered the supporting D at the point to make it a 3-3 in the zone.One the 2-2 the new D played the point and the supporting new forwards covered one point each to make it a 4-4. So it is a good way to practice recongnizing who to cover on the backcheck.


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101208083750407

10’
E1 2-0 Change on Go Shootout


Key Points:

The main goal of this shootout is for the goalies to battle and never give up on shots. It is more realistic if only one pass per shot is allowed but if the goal is for the goalie to battle put no restrictions on the shooters.

Description:

1. Half the team in each box and as many pucks on the blue line as the number of the largest team.
2. Two players leave from the box, get a puck from the blue line and shoot until they score.
3. After scoring race back and touch the player box gate so the next two can leave.
4. First team to score all the pucks wins.
5. Losers do a chore or exercise.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121109085854143


Blue Practice Plan 02-11-14

Posted on: November 02 2014 @ 03:08 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The original plan is to have Gaston come and work on skating but there was a snow storm last night and he is going to see how the highway is before driving into town. So this is a contingency practice. We played last night and won 5-4 but some players are struggling with defensive zone coverage, especially the wingers who are going low into the corner and leaving the points open. So a good review is in order. Jim will do the power play which has been good. Three of our our 5 goals came on the PP but that is something that usually comes and goes. We have to get our GA to two or less a game. Monday we have a 75 min. ice time at one rink and then go to Canada Olympic Park and have a one hour skill session with the HC coaches. I may be on my own for the first session, so I want to get the team play done now. My player who got the broken collarbone played in his first two games this week and the player who got the spinal injury is practicing and can play in about ten days.


Blue Practice Plan 02-11-14 Time: 10:15-11:15 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Review good habits and team play. Power Play, defensive zone coverage, clear the
Zone, skate to the big ice, defense footwork.

6’
C1 Flow with Breakout Timing 1-0, 2-0


Key Points:

Players taking the pass must face the puck and give a target. Player passing should get between the dots with feet moving then pass. On a 2-0 only allow one pass in the offensive zone before shooting.

Description;

1. Players are lined up down the centre of the rink in the C1 formation. Pucks in the corner.
2. The first player at each end, 1 and 2 leave, pick up a puck, skate down the ice, shoot and rebound.
3. Next player in line leave and time the support from either the boards or the middle lane and give a target for a breakout pass. Then go down and shoot.
4. Progress to 2 players giving support from the boards and middle lane.
5. Regroups can be added by having the passer follow the attack.

* 1-1 and 2-1 can be created by another player leaving the line and defending.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012043009313437

6’
C1 2-0 Skate Inside and Pass Outside


Key Points

Skate to the big ice between the dots with the puck and pass to the outside. Pass and follow the pass taking the ice behind.

Description:

1. Line up in the C1 formation at the bluelines.
2. Two players leave from the front of each line and get a puck from the corner.
3. The first player skate inside the dot with the puck and pass to the second player on the outside.
4. First player follow the pass and cross ‘taking the ice behind.’
5. The second player receive the pass and skate between the dots.
6. The second player now passes wide to the first player and follows the pass.
7. Shoot and rebound after one pass in the offensive zone.

mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221221695

10’

Forwards at one end and defense at the other end. Goalie with each group.

Alex – Footwork with defensemen.

Jim – Ron - Cycle in a triangle.


21’
T2-4Kingston Team Play Rotation


Rotate each 7’

Jim and Ron one end with the power play one group of 5.

Tom and Alex other end with 2 lines. Dzone coverage with sticks upside down.

17’

D100 5-5 controlled scrimmage.


T2 T4 D100 Controlled Scrimmage

Key Points:

Work on team play concepts with the coaches on the ice. Description: Play full strength or any situation from 3 on 3 to 6 on 5. The extra players are on the bench. If the whistle goes everyone must stop where they are so the coach can give input on what he/she wants.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagall ... 0123912842

Freeze on the whistle. Offending team 1 push up and offending player 5.

Offenses on coverage and decisions.
---------------------------------------
Gaston ended up coming and was an hour early because of the Daylight Saving Time change over. He did the forward stride, Choctaw transition turn and a 1-1 drill. It was very worthwhile. I will do most of the above practice plan tomorrow.






Jasper Skating and Hockey Camp - Starts Aug 10, 2015

Posted on: November 03 2014 @ 03:27 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Sharpen your skates, reserve your room, buy your bear spray and get in shape for a lot of hiking and biking.

Because the Jasper Skating and Hockey Camp - Starts Aug 10, 2015

This is three weeks later than the usual start in July.

I will post last years brochure. Highlight is 7.5 hours of skating with former Olympic coach Gaston Schaeffer and 7.5 hrs. of hockey skills and game sense in 5 days with me. The figure skaters have three on ice sessions per day with Gaston. There is an optional white water rafting trip on Wednesday morning and plyometrics and stretching for both hockey players and figure skaters just before dinner. Good technique in skating, puck handling, passing and solid playing habits are the themes of the camp.

Here are last years prices so add about $50 to each.

H Power Skating & Hockey or Figure Skating
Day camp (no meals)
$375 + GST

Day camp w/ two meals
$480 + GST

Day camp w/ accommodation and meals
$780 + GST There are dorm rooms with bunk beds below the recreation centre. The rec. centre has a new fitness facility and a pool that the kid's usually go swimming after dinner.


Blue Practice 03-11-14

Posted on: November 03 2014 @ 10:11 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Taking the cancelled practice from yesterday and changed it a bit as just Jim and I are there. After practice the players take off their skates and drive up a mile or so to Canada Olympic Park for a skills session by their staff.

Blue Practice 03-11-14

Practice is posted in the pdf. below. I have get ready to leave for the arena.


Blue Practice 06-11-14

Posted on: November 06 2014 @ 08:06 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice 06-11-14

After working on defense the Monday practice we played Tuesday and won a game 11-7. There goals were all on transition from turn overs and not from breaking down our dzone coverage. We had a one hour session at Crash Conditioning last night and they did a lot of core work.

Today's practice works on D to D and D to D to D, breakouts, regroups, passing, quick decisions, stick on puck, angling, escape moves and puck protection, edges, puck handling. We have Friday off and play onSaturday.

Next week is;
Sunday - practice
Monday - practice
Tuesday - no practice - arenas closed for Remembrance Day.
Wednesday - Crash Conditioning
Thursday - Practice
Friday-Sat-Sunday - leave for a tournament in Cranbrook, British Columbia, We will play 4 and maybe 5 games.

My player who got the spinal injury two months ago will probably be cleared to play when he sees the doctor on Nov. 10. He has been practicing for a few weeks now. The player who got a broken collarbone in the same game vs. the unsportsmanlike team has been back for two weeks.

Team picture really shows the size difference at this age. Biggest 6'2" 207 lbs. (we got measured a few weeks ago, so the pre season sizes have changed. Smallest 4'11" and 90 lbs.


Blue Practice 09-11-14

Posted on: November 10 2014 @ 03:31 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Another crazy game on Saturday night. We were awful in the second period and fell behind 5-2 and then dominated the third with 22 shots. Tied it 5-5 with three minutes left then they scored with one minute left and we tied it with 3" left. We are scoring a lot but are giving up way too many goals. The problems range from giveaway's on high risk decisions, weak goals, not taking sticks in the slot. Our specialty teams are really good. So 3-0-1 in our last four games but we can't bank on scoring 5+ goals a game. We don't take very many penalties.

Players take turns being good on defense. In the 13-7 game it was one set of D were on for 6 GA. In the last game one line was on for 5 GA and that set of D played ok. The key is for them to get the good habits that take the highs and lows away, especially the lows. We are just rolling lines, so benching isn't an option right now. One player who was our weakest forward the first 8 games is now playing well and that is the key. To get everyone to the point that they can make a positive contribution and they can't get better sitting on the bench. The last five minutes is the only time we bench manage and only if they game is on the line.

This practice works on defenseman footwork, cycling in the offensive zone, good habits with the puck and covering away from the puck, angling and tight gaps. We go to a tournament on the weekend where we will play 4-6 games depending on if we are winning or not.

We have another practice tonight, off-ice on Wednesday, practice again Thursday evening and leave early Friday morning for the weekend tournament.

The player who got the spinal injury at the start of September sees the doctor today and we are expecting that he will get clearance to play.


I get the shots and the +/- charted for each period and then put together a summary for the coaches. I have attached the last game as an example. We chart where and who took each shot for each team and circle the goal scorer and put the +/- on the same sheet. I get a sheet after each period.


Blue 10-11-14 Practice

Posted on: November 12 2014 @ 04:26 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue 10-11-14 Practice

We started with figure eights in each zone and the players had to do exercises to loosen the shoulders while crossing over.
1. Puck only on the forehand side of the stick.
2. Puck only on the backhand side of the stick.
3. Face the far end and agility skate, then take a shot and go the other direction.

Small horeshoe that requires good passing and receiving and the 2-0 requires timing.

Double regroup options. This has lots of passing and timing and we had the D go D to D to D. Dump ins were added and then the middle D joined the rush to make it 3-0 and the D took the shot.

Full ice 4-4 two second game and goals only count on one touch shots. This game causes close puck support and the players to pass and follow the pass. The one touch shot rule encourages one timers and players going hard to the net. It was a lot better than the first time we did it.

The D did agility skating-shooting and then worked on breakout options, while the F's did a 2/3 zone low battle 2 on 2 game where they had to regroup with a Joker who had to shoot while the attackers tried to screen, tip and rebound and defenders to box out, tie up sticks and the goalie had to fight to see the puck and control rebounds. We will do this more.

Wally Kozak did battling and puck protection exercises and some quick start skating.


Blue Practice Plan 13-11-14

Posted on: November 13 2014 @ 08:58 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 13-11-14 Time: 17:45-18:45 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:

Skate, pass, shoot, rebound, agility Attack the net, play tough defense in slot,
Puck support, go to the net, point shots Screen, tip, rebound, timing, stay on side
Regroup, breakout, 2-1, 3-2, 2-2. Angling, battling



8’
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:

3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from
the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3
lanes and shoot.

Description:

1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

7’ Focus on Timing and staying onside
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe


Key Points:


This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your
top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.

Description:

1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle
lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a
trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

8’
C3 Double Regroup 3-0 to 2-1and 5-0 to 3-2 - Pro


Key Points:

Give a target for the passes, face the puck, pass while skating, make the first pass early on the 2-1, D co-operate with the goalie to make it a 2-2 and don't allow a second play late. Slide outside the post if a pass across is the only play.

Description:

1. Players line up along the boards on both sides in the neutral zone.
2. Start with F1 and F2 one touch passing with D1.
3. F's skate through the neutral zone and regroup with D2.
4. F's attack 2 on 1 vs. D1.
5. F3 and F4 repeat by one touch passing with D2 and regrouping with D3. *If there are at least 8 D you could use this sequence and have two 1 on 1's at the same time in opposite directions.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131025152134950

12’ Half F and half D at each end. 2 on 2 focus on dominating the slot on offense and defense.
DT400 Low Zone Battles with Jokers at Point


Key Points:

Attackers must go to the net to screen, for rebounds, tips and cycle low. Defenders must talk and stay man on man unless impossible and then switch. Box out, seal sticks to the outside, tie up sticks in the slot.

Description:

1. The game is played from the top of the circles down.
2. Play from 1-1 to 3-3.
3. Players must pass to the point to go onto offense.
4. Joker at the point must take a wrist or snap shot.

* Keep score and when in the teaching mode stop the play and have player who doesn't cover someone do 5 push-ups and his teammates 1 PU.

7’
B6 Point Shots


Key Points:

Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.

Description:

Option One

a. One pass to two and then screen goalie.
b. Two drag and shoot.
c. One go to point for a shot then opposite corner.
d. Three pass to four then screen goalie.
e. Four drag and shoot.

Option Two

f. Two stay at the mid point and get a pass from four and shoot before rotating.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462

8’
C2 Angling 2-1 Wally


Key Points:

Defender create an angle from inside to cut the ice in half, deflect the play wide, angle at the back of the inside shoulder with the stick on the puck and finish. Second checker mirror from a little behind.

Description:

1. Coach shoot the puck across the ice on the attacking teams half or dump it softly.
2. Red 1 race for the puck and attack the Blue net.
3. Blue 1 and 2 tag up at the blue line then arc slightly behind the puck carrier to cut the ice in half.
4. Blue 1 close the gap approaching toward the back shoulder with body on body and stick on the puck.
5. Blue 1 rub out Red 1 and Blue 2 pick up the puck.
6. Blue 1 and 2 attack the other way while Red 1 back checks.
7. Repeat with Blue 3 on offense vs. Red 1-2.
* This can also be done as a 1-1 drill to teach the concepts of angling - deflect-steer-angle-finish with body on body and stick on the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130902174459633

10’
D100 Scrimmage with Extra Players on Bench


Key Points:

Play a full ice game with the extra players on the bench. Change on the whistle.
Pass back to the goalie when changing on the whistle.

Description:

1. Play with the rules there must be at least one pass made in each zone and goals only count on one touch shots.
2. Change of the whistle or players change on the go.
3. Keep score.
4. If no face-offs then scoring team touch the red line before checking.





Blue Practice Plan 19-11-14

Posted on: November 19 2014 @ 11:13 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is the first practice in about a week. We have had 6 games in the last 5 days. 5 games in 50 hours at a tournament in Cranbrook. We implemented the 1-3-1 Torpedo at the tournament and walked through it in the lunch room. We have really cut the shots against down and are getting a lot of scoring chances. Today we will walk through it on the ice.
-------


Blue Practice Plan 19-11-14

Time:17:45-19:00 Venue: Stu Peppard

Topics

Puck handle, pass, shoot, 3-0 attack options 1-1, transition D join rush and F backcheck, Torpedo 1-3-1, puck support, give and go


Blue Practice 24-11-14

Posted on: November 24 2014 @ 09:34 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan Date: 24-11-14 Time: 17:00-18:30 Venue: Max 2


Topics:

3 lines, forecheck, pp, pk, one touch, Regroup, 1-1, 2-2, 2-1, 2-3, 3-2, 3-3, 4-5, Read the rush, transition, shootout


8’
B6 One Touch x 3 and Shoot


Key Points:

One touch pass. Firm stick and follow through at the target. Both line move all the time.

Description:

B6 from diagonal corners down each side of the ice. Start with one player at each line and one extra behind.

A. 1 skate and give and go with 2.
B. 1 give and go with 3.
C. 1 give and go with 4.
D. 1 go in and shoot-rebound and become 5.
E. 2-3-4-5 keep moving forward after each pass.

Continue this flow from each side and then move to the other side and change directions.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120226094511455

10”
B6 Regroup-Breakout-2-0 x 2 – Pro


Key Points:

Face the puck, give a target, pass while skating, shoot while skating, follow shot for a rebound.

Description:

A. 1 skate and pass across to 2.
B. 2 pass to 3 at the far end.
C. 3 skate and regroup with 2.
D. 2 pass to 1 and 1-2 attack and shoot.
E. Repeat the other way; 4 pass across to 3.
F. 3 regroup with 5 at the far end.
G. 5 pass to 3.
H. 3 and 4 attack the opposite end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141124101203829

10’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:


Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on 1 on each side vs. #2.

*With younger players stagger the start so each corner leaves after the first pass.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

10’
DT400 1-1, 2-2, Support-Attack-Defend


Key Points:

Defending player stay on the defensive side. Supporitng player give a target for the pass and get into an open lane.

Description:

1.F1 attack D1 at each end.
2. Players line up on the boards with the first player in line D1 supporting the defense.
3. The coach can determine whether the supporting defender is passive or active.
4. On a turnover or a goal the breakout pass is made to the supporting defender from D1 to F2..
5. Carry the puck to the red line or if the team has a full ice practice, carry the puck to the far blue line.
6. F2 Attack vs. the original attacker F1. Practice various situations. The big left handed player with the sweat suit is Dany Heatley. It is just after he won the Calder trophy. He came to say hi to the players but because we were playing transition games participated in the whole practice and then stayed and posed for pictures with each of the players.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726104059741

10’
DT100 Read-Act to Situation 1-1 to 3-3


Key Points:

Transition game where the players must read the ever changing situations and act to make them even. Transition happens on a turnover, a goal or the goalie freezes the puck. The closest player support to create an even situation.

Description:

A. B1-2-3 attack R1-2-3.
B. R5-6 support the attack and B4 the defenders.
C. On transtion B4 attack R4-5 and B1-2-or 3 support the attack making it 2-2.
D. Blue Coach sends B5 to support the attack.
E. Red Coach sends R6-7 to support defense.
F. On transition R6-7 attack B5 and B1 or B2 read the outnumber situation and backcheck to make it a 2 on 2.
G. Coaches continue to randomly send 1 to 3 players to support.
H. Players read the situation and support to make it a 1-1, 2-2 or 3-3 attack.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2013022010052621

15’ each line 5’ in zone. PP one end PK at other.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation


Key Points:
Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give. If the D forces then the low play is available, if the F forces then the point is open. If the pk box is passive then there is a 2-1 at each corner, a 3-2 on each side and seams between players to attack. Force the pace by taking a shot by a different player every 3 seconds. Coach in each zone

Description:


- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

10’ 3’ each review dzone and forecheck

T2-4 Team Play Practice Rotation

Key Points:


Practice various situations at each end. One vs. pressure and one no pressure. Switch roles when the puck goes to the no pressure end. Review any team concept.

Description:

Sequence
1. Practice game situation at one end.
2. Shoot the puck down on a turn over or after a certain time.
3. Practice 5-0 for 60".
4. Shoot puck down to first group who have rotated.

8’
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage


Key Points:

Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:


Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.

They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

9’
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout

Key Points:

Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes.

Description:

1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.

*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595

------------------------------------
Last game we tied with about 10' left and the goalie pulled. Outshooting teams by 10-20 shots most games but making bad decisions when last man with the puck or pinching on the strong side. I will post the stats I get on shots, goals and +/-.


Blue Practice 27-11-14

Posted on: November 27 2014 @ 10:16 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 27-11-14 Time: 17:30-18:30 Venue: George Blunden


Goals:
Focus on individual defensive skills Stick on the puck, body checking, taking
Hits on the boards, puck protection Poke check, stick slap, offensive bump
Get the puck out, battle on boards Battle in front, fronting



10’ 3 hard stride skating first 3'
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:

Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.

Description:

1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

15’ - Tom with all the players
B – Intro to Contact: Shoulder check - Tom


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014031416344697

B - Taking a Check on the Boards – Sw - Tom
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140313175050979

B - Stick on the Puck – Sw - Tom
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140317153804305

15’ One end Alex the other end Tom

Alex 5’each skill

B - Shoulder Check – Sw - Alex
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140318152745586

B - Poke Check - Alex
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140317153424987

B - Open Ice Shoulder Check – Sw - Alex
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140318152158716

15’

Tom Wally 5’ each skill

B5 - Neutral zone Angling – Pro - Tom
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014032014381730

B - Angling – Sw - Tom
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140320144146657

A - Chip and Spin Escape Move – Sw - Tom
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140318151723521

20’
Tom and Wally one end Alex the other – switch 10’


Tom-Wally

C300 1-1 Race for a Dump in the Corner – Sw
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140417203022411

Alex

C300 - 1 on 1 Battle in Front – Sw

Key Points:


Attacker battle to keep his stick free and defender keep the defensive side and tie up the stick when it is exposed. Attacker shoot and go for the rebound and defender keep the stick on the puck and box out after a shot.

Description:

1. One attacker and one defender in the slot.
2. Extra players on the side to keep the puck in and restrict the playing area.
3. Coach passes from the top of the circle.
4. Offensive player battle to keep his stick free and gain the offensive side and shoot.
5. Defender battle from the defensive side and box out the attacker with stick on the puck.
6. Coach pass a new puck when the a puck is out of play.
7. Compete 15-20 seconds and keep score.
8. Battle without taking penalties and stress good technique.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014041719184157

------------------------
We had an awful game with no intensity. It was only the third time this season that we were outworked and outshot but it was ugly. I am attaching the shots. We played very soft and are working on body checking and battling today. We have another practice Sat. and play Sunday.






Blue Practice Plan 29-11-14

Posted on: November 29 2014 @ 05:02 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 29-11-14 Time: 17:30-18:30 Arena: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Full team and 3 affiliates
Battle, take sticks, pass to point, screen Tip, 1-1, 1-1-1, 2-2, 3-2, 2-1, 2-0, 3-0
Race, agility, big moves, edges, Backcheck, rebounds



7’
A300 x 2 Skating and Puck Handling Warm-up with Shots


Key Points:


Do various moves with the puck and finish with a shot.

Description:

One group rotate clockwise and the other counter clockwise.
1. Do various skating moves with the puck.
2. Big moves all around the body, in the skates, through the legs etc.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121031084114911


8’
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:

Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle and get a pass from the corner then shoot-rebound, get a pass from
the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3 lanes and shoot.

Description:

1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

10’
B600 Double Regroup Options 2-0, 2-1, 3-0, 3-2


Key Points:

Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:

1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10’ 2 on 2 at each end
DT400 Low Zone Battles with Jokers at Point


Key Points:

Attackers must go to the net to screen, for rebounds, tips and cycle low. Defenders must talk and stay man on man unless impossible and then switch. Box out, seal sticks to the outside, tie up sticks in the slot.

Description:

1. The game is played from the top of the circles down.
2. Play from 1-1 to 3-3.
3. Players must pass to the point to go onto offense.
4. Joker at the point must take a wrist or snap shot.

* Keep score and stop the play and have player who doesn't cover someone do 5 push-ups and his teammates 1 PU.

10’
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game 3-3 If attackers score on the rebound 5 push ups.

Key Points:

Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:

Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

8’
D400 Best Player Wins the Game 1 on 1 on 1


Key Points:

-Battle hard for the puck.
-Protect the puck.
-Get a shot and fight for the Rebound.

Description:

1. Players line up outside the blueline. They can be in 3 teams and keep score or just everyone vs. everyone.
2. Coach fires the puck in and whoever gets the puck tried to score vs the other two.
3. If another player gets the puck he tries to score; including rebounds.
4. On whistle pass back to the coach and race out.
5. 15-20 second shifts.


7’
E1 Shootout Race


Key Points:

Players must have one skate on the dot at the start. No hooking or tripping. Skate to get D side and get the puck. *This is a great contest for puck protection, battling, scoring and a good anaerobic conditioning exercise. Keep score with one colour vs the other.

Description:

1. Players are lined up behind the face of dots at each end.
2. A player from each team race for the puck which the coach puts on the middle dot.
3. Protect the puck and try to score vs backchecking opponent.
4. Another puck on the dot and repeat the other way.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723063235226

-------------------------------
Played Sunday afternnon and had our whole line-up for the first time in a league game. The competitive practices seemed to really pay off and we won 9-1. The back pressure was great and we forced them to turn the puck over and quickly went on offense. Our goalies made the first save and we controlled the slot and tied up sticks and didn't allow second shots. Overall a great game for us. I have attached the game stats.






Hockey Bio

Posted on: December 01 2014 @ 03:53 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I just updated my Hockey Biography and am posting it here.

--------------------------------------------------

Tonight did the Hockey Canada skills at Winsport.but got there 90 minutes early to meet with the sports psychologist the our association contracts. He did a good session on preparing themselves to play. The skills session had skating edges and agility, wrap-arounds, point shots, screening, and two games for competing in various situations. Have a game Tuesday evening.


Blue Practice Plan 04-12-14

Posted on: December 05 2014 @ 02:58 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 04-12-14, 17:45-18:45 Stu Peppard

Notes:

Puck handle, shoot, 1-1, 2-1, regroup, D to D hinge, dzone, PK rotation, battle,
2-2 transition, shoot-out


8’
B6 or B4 Crossover Skating and Puckhandling


Key Points:

This is a great skating and puck handling warm up drill. Many variations can be used with the puck or in skating tasks.
Do a different skill in each zone. Keep the feet moving it is crossover in large #8's and not tight turns. You can also do as a B6 and start out of opposite corners.

Description:

Cross Overs and Puck Handling Skills

Do figure 8's in each zone.

1. Quick hands and quick feet fwd
2. Skate backwards
3. Face the far end transition skate
4. Carry puck using only the forehand
5. Use only the backhand.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120418155124444

10’
B600 Double Regroup Options


Key Points:

Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:

1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on 1 on each side vs. #2.
*With younger players stagger the start so each corner leaves after the first pass.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

12’ Ron-Tracey 2-2 battling game with Torpedos.

DT400 Low Zone Battles with Jokers at Point

Key Points:

Attackers must go to the net to screen, for rebounds, tips and cycle low. Defenders must talk and stay man on man unless impossible and then switch. Box out, seal sticks to the outside, tie up sticks in the slot.

Description:

1. The game is played from the top of the circles down.
2. Play from 1-1 to 3-3.
3. Players must pass to the point to go onto offense.
4. Joker at the point must take a wrist or snap shot.

* Keep score and when in the teaching mode stop the play and have player who doesn't cover someone do 5 push-ups and his teammates 1 PU.

12’ Tom with Backs. Dzone and Pk review. 3-3 low and pk rotation.


10’
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2


Key Points:

Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles. Defenders play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush.

Description:

1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 2 on 2 attack F1 and F2 vs D1 and D2.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive F1 and F2 support D and attacking team D1 and D2 support F's.
4. Play 4 on 4 in the zone.
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. The supporting players who joined the play now go 2 on 2 in the other direction.
7. F2 - F3 support D1 and D2 and D3 and D4 support attacking F1 and F2.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141210845

10’
E1 Gambling Shootout


Key Points:

Simulate a real shootout by placing the puck on the dot and the player starting on the whistle and the goalie not moving until the player touches the puck. Get the goalie used to shootout skating.

Description:

1. One player at a time shoots.
2. Simulate a real shootout with the same rules.
3. Players bet and go to one side if they think a goal will be scored and the other side if they think save.
4. Players who bet wrong must skate across and back.
5. Alternate ends.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111004080315971



Blue Practice Plan 08-12-14

Posted on: December 11 2014 @ 05:07 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Greatest Hockey Comeback I have Ever Seen.

We played Tuesday night and were behind 2-4 and with 1:52 left they took a penalty. We pulled the goalie and had a 6-4 pp. We scored about 30" in to make it 3-4.

Pulled our goalie aganin for a 6 on 5 and scored with about a minute left.

Played 5-5 and scored to go up 5-4.

They pulled their goalie and we scored into an empty net with 3" left to win 6-4.

I have played for over 50 years and coached for 40 and have never seen that happen before.

A video of the last two minutes is below.


Blue vs Stamps 4-2 to 6-4

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014121110265452

Our Monday night practice is attached befow.


Blue Practice Plan 11-12-14

Posted on: December 11 2014 @ 07:00 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan Date: 11-12-14 Time: 16:00-17:15 Venue: Optimist

Notes:
Breakouts, regroup, slap shot, passing, Play behind the net, power play review
D to D to D, back checking, agility Parent meeting follows.


10’ Start with 2’ of Big moves and a shot.

B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig-zags, 3 Shots Slap Shots Only on Rush

Key Points:


3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from
the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3
lanes and shoot.

Description:

1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

7’
D4 - Jokers Behind the Net


Key Points:

Move when they get the puck. Try to make passes for one timer shots. Either the puck or the player moves. Game works on Role One with the puck and Role Two supporting the puck.

Description:

1. Play with teams of from 1 to 5 players.
2. Each team has a joker below the goal line.
3. No one checks the joker.
4. All goals must come from plays started by the joker.
5. Play both even and odd man situations.
6. Keep score and play tournaments.
7. Progress to jokers can check jokers.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120425092815856

10’
B600 Double Regroup Options


Key Points:

Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:

1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

30’
5’ using Spread, 5’ Diamond, 5’ Overload 5’ explanation before each.


TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage

Key Points:

Rotation is Attack-Defend-Rest. Number the players so they know when to not defend. In even numbered situations you can require the defenders to breakout into the neutral zone before passing.

Description:


1. Power play attack vs 2 F and 2 D.
2. Defenders ice the puck and rest.
3. Group waithing at far blue attack.
4. Original attackers now defend 1 short.
5. Goalies rotate in.
6. Create any situation by changing the number of attackers or defenders.
7. Even strength can also be practiced.

*Option is to have waiting players breakout from behind the goal line and do a pk forecheck.

10’
C3 Double Regroup 2-1 - Pro then 3-2


Key Points:

Give a target for the passes, face the puck, pass while skating, make the first pass early on the 2-1, D co-operate with the goalie to make it a 2-2 and don't allow a second play late. Slide outside the post if a pass across is the only play.

Description:

1. Players line up along the boards on both sides in the neutral zone.
2. Start with F1 and F2 one touch passing with D1.
3. F's skate through the neutral zone and regroup with D2.
4. F's attack 2 on 1 vs. D1. 5. F3 and F4 repeat by one touch passing with D2 and regrouping with D3.
*If there are at least 8 D you could use this sequence and have two 1 on 1's at the same time in opposite directions.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131025152134950

10’
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Key Points:

The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:

1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227

We did off ice conditioning at Crash on Wednesday.

Parent meeting after practice.







Blue Practice Plan 14-12-14

Posted on: December 14 2014 @ 05:26 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 14-12-14

Time: 16:15-17:30 Arena: Southland

Notes:
Game play with rules, weave, passing Point shots, screen, tip, transition
1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 4-4, 8-8, D breakout options F puck handling and passing




10 min
B6 3-0 Weave-Regroup at Far End – Pro


Key Points:

Principles: Pass while skating and then follow the pass and take the ice behind the puck carrier.. Fill the 3 lanes. Skate to the “big ice” between the dots when you get the puck. Pass to the outside lane, skate to the inside lane.

Description:
A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass.
B. 2 skate to the big ice, pass to 3, follow the pass taking the ice behind.
C. 3 pass back to one, follow the pass.
D. 1 regroup with 4 and 1-2-3 fill each lane.
E. 4 pass to 1 or 3 on the strong side.
F. 1-2-3 weave the same way and attack with a triangle and shoot at the oringinal end.
G. 4-5-6 follow and repeat the other way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130125095322120

NHL Players.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141025100818703

20’
D4 Game where players must get onside.


Three games of 6’

Game one – goals only on slap shots or one timers.

Game two – 2” and only one touch goals.

Game three – only forehand passes and one touch goals.

15’
DT100 Continuous 1-1, 2-1, 2-2


Key Points:

New players don't leave the line-up until the puck enters the offensive zone. On dump outs no one change but go back and regroup with the same players. Changes occur when the puck is over the offensive blue line or controlled over the defensive blue line.

Description:

1. Attack 1-1 with D getting support from 1 F and F from one D.
2. Defending F1 cover the point.
3. New offensive D join and play point.
4. On transition attack 1-1 thru nzone.
5. Continue flow with new O and D support. -Continue the flow of 1-1 in nzone and 2-2 at each end. -Dump-ins and regroups can be added.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726085538618

10’ Jim F’s Alex D
B Skills Warm up Finnish U17


Key Points:

This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on technique and rebound control.

Description
A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.
B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - #8 around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.
C. Goalies work with coach at one end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140131221040649

10’
B6 Point Shots


Key Points:

Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.

Description:

Option One

a. One pass to two and then screen goalie.
b. Two drag and shoot.
c. One go to point for a shot then opposite corner.
d. Three pass to four then screen goalie.
e. Four drag and shoot.

Option Two

f. Two stay at the mid point and get a pass from four and shoot before rotating.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462

10’
D1 Full Ice All Play


Key Points:

Everyone plays shinny style.

Description:

1. All play at the same time.
2. Use a puck or multiple pucks, ball or balls.
3. When the goalie freezes the puck the attackers back up behind the hash marks.
4. When a team scores they must touch the red line before checking.


Blue Practice 18-12-14

Posted on: December 18 2014 @ 11:04 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan Date: 18-12-14 17:30-18:30 Venue: Blunden

Notes:

Passing, timing, breakout, 5-0, middle drive Transition, 3-3, 2-2, back checking,
D join the rush, point shots, screen No ‘dusting off’ the puck on passes or shots.
Handle the puck in the triple threat position.

8’ No stickhandling on passes or shots.
B6 Chaos 3-0 Pass and Shoot


Key Points:

Give a target, pivot to face the puck all the time; use forehand passes and backhand only when passing forward.

Description:

1. Three players leave from each end.
2. Each group passes one puck in nzone.
3. On the whistle player with the puck shoot.
4. Other two players save ice and get a pass from the corner and shoot. a few seconds apart.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101006084345432

8’
B6-600 Flow - Breakout 2 F Shoot - D Point Shot – Finland U20


Key Points:

Make hard passes, give a target, keep skating while making plays, follow shots for rebounds, stop at the net, screen.

Description:

Start at both ends with players on each side of the net and pucks in all four corners.


1 – D1 start by skating up an back get a puck and bank pass behind the net to D2. D1 goes to the corner.
2 – D2 pass to F1 breaking along the boards.
3 – F2 skates to the big ice between the dots and pass to F2. D2 follow then circle back to the corner.
4 – F2 skate down and shoot then skate to corner. F1 skate around the middle circle for a pass from D2.
5 – D1 bump a puck to D2 who skates between the dots and pass to F1 who skates down ice and shoots.
6 – D2 then follow the play up the ice and get a pass from F2 in the corner then drag and shoot – F1-F2 screen.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20140426122809756

8’
DT400 Game of Quick Transition


Key Points:

The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.

Description:


1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Up to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack.
5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

8’ Attack with speed and hard to the net.

B200 - Regroup 5-0 Middle Drive – Detroit


Key Points:

Everyone joins the attack. First player without the puck go to the net hard. Next two create a reverse triangle. 4th and 5th attacker join the rush.

Description:

1. Players line up on one side in the neutral zone.
2. Start with a forward passing back to a defenseman.
3. Forwards fill the three lanes.
4. Go D to D and pass up to the forwards.
5. Attack with all five players.
6. Next group of 5 repeat the other way when the rush crosses the blue line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141216105644494

8’
Box out and take sticks. Push ups if rebound goal against.

DT100 Backchecking Transition Game

Key Points:

Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:

Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

8’ We will go 1-1 and then 2-1.
DT100-D Join Attack and F Backcheck

Key Points:

This is a continuous 2-1 transition game using only one puck and no whistles. It practices situations in the nzone, teaches players who to cover in the dzone and how to support the attack.
Forwards enter the zone to support the defense and then attack and backcheck.
Defense support from the point, defend and then join the attack.
Coach can vary the number of F or D to create different situations in each zone.

Description:

1. Red F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs blue D1.
2. Blue F1-F2 support D1, Red D1 support F1 and F2.
3. Play 3 on 3
4. On Transition Blue F1-F2 attack Red D1.
5. Red F1-F2 Backcheck and Blue D1 join the rush.
6. Blue D2 and Red F3-F4 support when puck enters the zone.
7. Play 4 on 5 and continue flow.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726093546253

8’
E1 3-0 and 3-1 One Touch-One Timer


Key Points:

Square to the passer and have the stick back and ready. Follow through at the target with the outside knee pointing at the target.

Description:

3-0

1. Shooters form a umbrella and one touch pass and shoot.
2. New puck when the puck goes out of the playing area, goal or frozen puck.
3. Rotate in and positions each new puck.

3-1

Same as the 3-0 but now there is a defender.

*Keep score team vs. team and goalie vs. shooter.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141218155413934


Our team dropbox with game video and some skill video. https://www.dropbox.com/sh/i2t95bi6zsdho3p/AADEwbUvBmfx4J61dqysuVmEa?dl=0



Blue Practice Plan 22-12-14

Posted on: December 23 2014 @ 05:52 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 22-12-14 Time: 17:30-18:30 Venue: Stu PeppardLines:

Notes:
Pass, shoot, transition, one timers Regroup, jokers, point shots, low play
cycle

7’
202 Pass to All Players


Key Points:

Give and go pass. Give a target and make eye contact before passing.

Description:

1. Blues start with half on each blue line.
2. Reds weave around in the middle.
3. Red pass to each blue player.
4. Alternate sides each pass.
5. Switch every 30".
*Compete to see who makes the most passes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=99

8’
B202 - Regroup 1-0, 2-0 Pass Options – Pro


Key Points:

Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and lead the player so he doesn’t have to slow down. Shoot and rebound and either screen or rebound for the next shooter. Stay onside on the 2-0.

Description:

1. Players face each other across the neutral zone lined up with the dots.
2. Start with R1 passing ahead to B2 who passes over to B3. This pattern happens with B1 to R2 to R3 at the same time.
A. B3 make a cross ice pass to R1 who faces the play on the far wing and goes in for a shot.
B. R3 pass to B1 who mirrors the puck from the middle lane and goes wide for a shot.
C. R3 pass to R1 who mirrors the puck from the middle lane - attack wide. R2 join attack after passing across.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130201092546814

8’

Defensemen Shooting with Alex.

Forwards cycle with Jim


Goalies FJ


20’
DT5 Two Pass Regroup with Jokers and Escape Moves


Key Points:

This transition game requires on ice awareness and constant switching between game playing roles as
well as loose puck situations. Escape moves create time and space for the player. The puck carrier must
slide backward, sideways, tight turn etc.

Description:

Rules: You must regroup with a Joker to go on offense. Before passing or shooting you must make an
escape move. Jokers battle jokers but must stay behind the line. Two passes must be made before
scoring.

Game One:7’

Transition to offense requires the player must regroup with the player below the goal line.

Game Two: 7’

To transition to offense the player must regroup with the point.

Game Three: 6’

Joker at the point and below the goal line must get a pass before you can score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005152420831

10’
DT100 - 1-2, 2-3, Add Regroup - Juuso, Yursi - IIHF Symposium


Key Points:

Defenders must communicate and one play a 1-1 vs. the puck carrier. Create a defensive 2-1 vs. the puck carrier in each situation.

Description:
1. R1 attack 1 on 2 vs. B2-3.
2. R2-3 follow the play and wait in the nzone.
3. On a turn-over either B2 or B3 attack vs. R2 and R3
4. B3 and B4 follow and wait in the nzone to defend vs. either R2 or R3.
5. Continue this flow.
6. Add one attacker and one defender for a 2 on 3 situation.
7. Add a neutral zone regroup on the coaches whistle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131201174929789

.
7’
E1 3-0 and 3-1 One Touch-One Timer


Key Points:

Square to the passer and have the stick back and ready. Follow through at the target with the outside knee pointing at the target.

Description:

3-0

1. Shooters form a umbrella and one touch pass and shoot.
2. New puck when the puck goes out of the playing area, goal or frozen puck.
3. Rotate in and positions each new puck.

3-1

Same as the 3-0 but now there is a defender.

*Keep score team vs. team and goalie vs. shooter.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141218155413934


Explanation/Notes:





Blue Practice Plan 23-12-14

Posted on: December 23 2014 @ 06:01 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 23-12-14

Time: 16:15-17:45 Venue: Optimist

Notes:

One touch, tournament, puck handle, Passing, point shots, high cycle, transition,
Low battle, puck support, dzone coverage




20’ Jim lead the Big Moves and the Fakes
A200 Russian Puck Handling – Fake Shots and Finnish with a Shot


Key Points:

The idea of stick handling is to protect the puck from the opponent or to make him/her reach or straighten their knees and then go around them.

Description:

Players are in four lines and do multiple fake shots and moves, then finish with a shot. Start with the 'Big Moves Routine' and then move to Jursi's fake shot sequence.

. Practice Faking a slapshot with a hard back swing.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the backhand side.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the forehand side.
. Fake a slapshot and then do a backhand tight turn around opponent.
. Fake a slapshot and reach out like you are going around the opponent on your forehand and then pull the puck quickly to your backhand and go around opponent.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130321101649551

8’
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe


Key Points:

This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your
top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.

Description:

1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle
lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a
trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

10’
C3 Breakout-Attack-F Cycle up and Drop to D - Finland


Key Points:

This drill has a breakout at each end with a 3-0 attack 2 F and 1 D. Attackers move to the big ice when they get the puck. It ends with a high cycle and pass to the strong side D.

Description:

1. D1 drive the back of the net and pass across to D2.
2. D2 move the puck up the ice quickly to either F1 or F2 who is cutting across from the weak side.
3. F1 and F2 always carry the puck to the inside and pass to the outside and shoot at the far end.
4. Either F1 or F2 get a puck from the corner and cycle high up the boards and pass to D2.
5. D2 either shoot or pass to F1 or F2 who is skating to the net on the weak side.
6. This drill happens at each end at the same time.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121028211245159

30’
4 Team Tournament – 3 Games


4 on 4

1- White
2- Blue
3- Red
4- Green

1 vs 4 D4 Two Pass
2 vs 3

2 vs 4 DT400 Low Zone Battles with Jokers at Point
1 vs 3

3 vs 4 DT400 Game of Quick Transition
1 vs 2

8’
D4 Two Pass


Key Points:

The quicker they make the passes after regaining the puck the more scoring chances they produce

Description:

1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits.

D4 Two Pass U15
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104513276

8’
DT400 Low Zone Battles with Jokers at Point


Key Points:

Attackers must go to the net to screen, for rebounds, tips and cycle low. Defenders must talk and stay man on man unless impossible and then switch. Box out, seal sticks to the outside, tie up sticks in the slot.

Description:

1. The game is played from the top of the circles down.
2. Play from 1-1 to 3-3.
3. Players must pass to the point to go onto offense.
4. Joker at the point must take a wrist or snap shot.

* Keep score and when in the teaching mode stop the play and have player who doesn't cover someone do 5 push-ups and his teammates 1 PU.

D4 Active Jokers at Point Must Shoot - U15
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104514143

D4 Active Jokers D Can Jump In - U15
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104515107


8’
DT400 Game of Quick Transition


Key Points:

The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.

Description:

1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Upt to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack.
5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.

DT400 Quick Transition Game - U15
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104512232


15’
Alex shooting with the D. Wally technique of the slap shot deliberate practice.

Jim 2-0 delay and go part way behind the net and pass back to the short side with the F.


10”
E1–D4 One Touch 4 on 2 – U15


Key Points:

One touch passes only. Give a target and be ready to pass and shoot. Slide into open lanes.

Description:

1. Four attackers set up in a box vs. two defenders.
2. Only one touch passes and one touch shots are allowed.
3. Move into open lanes for a pass.
4. Defenders keep sticks in the passing lanes and block shots.
5. Have a contest and keep score.

*Progression is to start with two touch and progress to one touch passes.

*Practice 4-0, 4-1 then 4-2.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141223112820665






The Game is the Best Coach

Posted on: December 24 2014 @ 05:04 PM
By: TomM

Content:

SAG Tournament Video Clips from Practice

We did the SAG tournament with three games last night at practice. There was a dispute about if the score was a tie or a win for one team so they did 'Rock-Paper-Scissors' to solve it and the team that claimed the win covered the rock with paper.

We kept track of the winners and the losing teams had to skate around a circle for every point they lost by. Two pts. for a win and one for a tie.


Game One Two Pass

D4 Two Pass U15
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104513276

Game Two - Active Jokers at the Point

D4 Active Jokers at Point Must Shoot - U15 Boy's

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104514143

We added the rule Jokers can jump in the last 5 minutes of the game.


D4 Active Jokers D Can Jump In - U15 Boy's

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104515107

Game Three - Game of Quick Transition

DT400 Quick Transition Game - U15 Boy's

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104512232

We finished with a one touch 4-2 shootout.

E1–D4 One Touch 4 on 2 – U15 Boy's

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141223112820665


Jasper

Posted on: December 28 2014 @ 03:54 PM
By: TomM

Content:

In Jasper National Park now doing a camp for the Jasper Hockey Association. It is a small association where younget players are needed to have enough for a team. We have one younget group of 10 boy's and 4 girl's and an older group with 13 boy's and 13 girl's. Each day they have a skating and a hockey session.

Yesterday we focused on puck handling with both groups and today, passing, Each day we do some shooting and we will work on angling with the older group on Monday. There are zero goalies, so we use 6 small nets and half of each session is modified games.

If you can skate and carry the puck with good technique then a player can be effective in games and it makes passing and shooting a lot more efficient.

Gaston is on the ice now teaching skating and Jim and I go on right after for our two sessions.


Blue Practice Plan 30-12-14

Posted on: January 02 2015 @ 04:05 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 30-12-14 14:45-16:15 Venue: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Shoot, pass, rebound, power play, regroups Breakout, 1-1, 2-1, 3-3, 4-4


3’ Big Moves
5’
B2 Transition Skate Shooting


Key Points:

Keep 2 hands on the stick and keep the feet moving. Hit the net.

Description:

B2 Transition Skate Shooting
1. Lineup on blue lines.
2. Skate to top of circle, back to blue, top of circle and shoot.
3. Next player leave when the first is going backward.
4. Each player have 3 or 4 pucks and keep shooting until they are all gone.
(got this drill coaching withTim Bothwell at the U of Calgary)

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120418155124444

6’
B5 - 3 Give and Go x 3 – Shoot - Rebound


Key Points:

Face the puck all of the time and keep moving in a semi circle with stick on the ice.

Description:

a. 1 exchange passes with 2 from about 5 metres skating in an arc.
b. 3 exchange passes with 4 after the second pass.
c. After 3 passes 1 and 3 shoot.
d. 1 and 3 follow shot and rebound for next shooter.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100820101216223

10’
B600 Double Regroup Options


Key Points:

Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:

1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

20’ Jim-Tom at ends. Alex passing in middle.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation


Key Points:

Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give. If the D forces then the low play is available, if the F forces then the point is open. If the pk box is passive then there is a 2-1 at each corner, a 3-2 on each side and seams between players to attack. Force the pace by taking a shot by a different player every 3 seconds. Coach in each zone

Description:

- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

12’
D1 One Pass in Each Zone


Key Points:

Close support, skate to open ice with the puck, give a target.

Description:

1. Play full ice either in shifts or all on the ice at once.
2. There must be at least one pass made in each zone. If not the other team gets the puck.
3. Controlled scrimmage so everyone stop on the whistle for coach input.
4. With shifts in a D100 game pass back to the goalie on the whistle.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011032414361323

10’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on 1 on each side vs. #2.
*With younger players stagger the start so each corner leaves after the first pass.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

10’
DT400 3-3 Perry Pearn Game Rotation


Key Points:

This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to 5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.
Description:
1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004080131252

6’
D200 3-3 with 3-2-1 Pucks


Key Points:

-Players can only shoot when the goalie is ready.
-No empty net goals.
-Situation continually changes as goals are scored and players have to read odd and even man numbers.

Description:

1. Players line up outside the blue lines.
2. Coach shoots in 3 pucks.
3. Players race for pucks and battle to score and defend.
4. Leave puck in the net after a goal and play with 2 pucks then 1 puck.
5. Pass pucks remaining to teammates on whistle.
4. Hustle out of the zone on the whistle and play 20-30 seconds only.
6. Count the pucks in the net after to determine the winning team.
*Option is to pass to teammates on the blue line. Another option is to skate behind the nets to start.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005185636266

6’
D200, 3 on 3 Game With No Passing


Key Points:

This game demands that the puck carrier dangle and beat the opponents with dekes, fakes, change of pace, pivots while teammates screen, pick and go for rebounds.

Description:

1. Play a cross ice game of 2-2 to 5-5.
2. Extra players line up along the blue line.
3. Shifts 20-30" and pass to teammate coming on on the whistle.
4. Coach put in a new puck on a goal.
5. Rule is NO PASSING.
6. Line mates support by setting screens and picks and going for rebounds.
7. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180047556

7’
E1 D200 Shootout Game


Key Points:

As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.

Description:

1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126






Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: January 02 2015 @ 04:14 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I had to change the practice from the original plan as one of the goalies was sick and they let me know just before practice.

Blue Practice Plan 01-01-15 11:45-13:15 Flames Arena

Notes:
Pp, pk, puck handle, point shots, puck Protection, regroups, weave, pass, shoot, battle

10’ Jim lead
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:

Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:

1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285


10’
A200 Russian Puck Handling – Fake Shots and Finnish with a Shot


Key Points:

The idea of stick handling is to protect the puck from the opponent or to make him/her reach or straighten their knees and then go around them. Vladimir Jursinov is probably the most successful skills coach in the world. This Soviet and Russian Olympic coach has helped more than 65 players into the NHL from his teams. He leads a group of 15-20 years olds in a fake shot sequence.

Description:

Players are in four lines and do multiple fake shots and moves, then finish with a shot.
. Practice Faking a slapshot with a hard back swing.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the backhand side.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the forehand side.
. Fake a slapshot and then do a backhand tight turn around opponent.
. Fake a slapshot and reach out like you are going around the opponent on your forehand and then pull the puck quickly to your backhand and go around opponent.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130321101649551

10’
B5 - 3 Give and Go x 3 – Shoot - Rebound


Key Points:

Face the puck all of the time and keep moving in a semi circle with stick on the ice.

Description:

a. 1 exchange passes with 2 from about 5 metres skating in an arc.
b. 3 exchange passes with 4 after the second pass.
c. After 3 passes 1 and 3 shoot.
d. 1 and 3 follow shot and rebound for next shooter.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100820101216223

10’ Start with Alex and Jim making sure a F posts up.
B6 3-0 Weave With D Regroup


Key Points:

-Skate with the puck to the big ice between the dots and then pass.
- Pass and follow your pass.
-Stay wide until you get the pass.

Description:

1. Half the forwards at each end in three lines behind the goal line with the D waiting at the
bluelines. Whites at one end and Blues at the other.
2. Middle player start by skating toward the strong side and pass to the wing and follow the pass
skating behind the new puck carrier.
3. Wing skate to the big ice between the dots and pass to the far wing then follow the pass.
4. Wide wing skate to the big ice and pass to the original centre who is now in the opposite wide
lane.
5. The D is skating backwards thru the middle zone and the puck is passed back to him for a
regroup the other direction.
6. On regroup one player supports on the strong side boards, one mirrors the puck in the middle
lane and one is in the wide lane.
7. D makes the pass and follow the attack into the zone.
8. The group at the other end leaves after the D passes up ice.

Options.

a. Add another D.
b. Add a second regroup.
c. Add a pass to the D for a point shot after the original rush.
d. When 2 D are used you can use 2 pucks to create and overload situation and have the forwards
take a shot followed by the D shooting the other puck.

15’
DT400 3-3 Perry Pearn Game Rotation


Key Points:

This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to 5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.

Description:

1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004080131252

15’
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support


Key Points:

Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills.

Description:


1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second. Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243

10’ Alex with D at one end.
B6 Point Shots


Key Points:

Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.

Description:

Option One
a. One pass to two and then screen goalie.
b. Two drag and shoot.
c. One go to point for a shot then opposite corner.
d. Three pass to four then screen goalie.
e. Four drag and shoot.

Option Two
f. Two stay at the mid point and get a pass from four and shoot before rotating.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462

10’
B5 Driving the Net from the Corner


Key Points:

Protect the puck with your body and turn away from pressure toward the boards. This is a drill the Flames coaches used a lot to practice going to the net.

Description:

1. The player shoots a puck into the corner and protects it vs. pressure from the coach.
2. After about 5 seconds the player gets his shoulder in front to protect the puck and cuts to the net to score.
3. The progression is to add a defensive player.

7’
E1 Gambling Shootout


Key Points:

Simulate a real shootout by placing the puck on the dot and the player starting on the whistle and the goalie not moving until the player touches the puck. Get the goalie used to shootout skating.

Description:

1. One player at a time shoots.
2. Simulate a real shootout with the same rules.
3. Players bet and go to one side if they think a goal will be scored and the other side if they think save.
4. Players who bet wrong must skate across and back.
5. Alternate ends.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111004080315971







Blue Practice 04-01-05

Posted on: January 05 2015 @ 02:06 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The first four months we stressed individual skills and good playing habits so all the players could get to the AA level or above. I think we have accomplished this. Now the team play will get more focus and be part of every practice while continuing to develop the individual skills the last two months. We named power play units and they practiced together today. This week is Calgary Minor Hockey Week starting Friday. We have a Monday practice, Tuesday league game and Wednesday off ice training before that.
----------------------

Blue Practice Plan 04-01-15


Time: 13:45-14:45 Venue: Southland

Notes:
Specialty teams, dside, one touch, 5-0 1-1, 2-1, 5-4, 4-5, 2-0, Divide players into three pp groups.


5’
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot


Key Points:

This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.

Description:

1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

5’
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:

Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.

Description:

1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

5’
B200 - Regroup 5-0 Middle Drive – Detroit


Key Points:

Everyone joins the attack. First player without the puck go to the net hard. Next two create a reverse triangle. 4th and 5th attacker join the rush.

Description:

1. Players line up on one side in the neutral zone.
2. Start with a forward passing back to a defenseman.
3. Forwards fill the three lanes.
4. Go D to D and pass up to the forwards.
5. Attack with all five players.
6. Next group of 5 repeat the other way when the rush crosses the blue line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141216105644494

30’ PP Jim PK Alex – 3 groups 10’ each. At one end
D400 Penalty Killing Practice

Key Points:

Closest player must pressure the puck in straight lines from the net out. Skate back when the puck is passed. Stick on the ice in passing lanes and stick on the puck when checking. Do not get tied up. Block shots.

Description:


1. A powerplay and a penalty killing unit at each end of the ice.
2. The coach passes in a puck from the line or from a face off dot.
3. Controlled scrimmage where everyone stops on a whistle.
4. If the puck is frozen, a goal or it is cleared put in a new puck.
5. After about 45 seconds do the same thing from the other end while the pp and pk units switch at the original end.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090806144359357

30’ Tom and Ron – Dside and stick on puck. 5’ then one touch 3-0, 3-1, 4-1.

B500 Cut Backs and Escape Moves

Key Points:

Protect the puck with the body on offense. Cut back turning toward the boards. Defender stay lined up with the back of the inside shoulder and stick on the puck.

Description:

1. Leave on the whistle and practice cut backs, tight turns. Go to the net on the second whistle while the next players leave.
2. Two players leave and the second player stays on the D side with the stick on the puck and gives passive resistance.
3. This is a battle and the defender tries to get the puck. On the second whistle whoever has the puck go to the net.
*Without goalies both sides can go at once and with a goalie alternate sides. Players switch sides after doing both offense and defense.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011041612155482

F202 - 5' Tactical skating in neutral zone.


Blue Practice 05-01-15

Posted on: January 06 2015 @ 02:30 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 05-01-14

Time: 16:30 Arena: Shouldice

Notes:
3-5 pk, passing, shoot, one timers 3-0, 3-1, 3-2, 5-0, regroup, Transition 2-1, 2-2
Shoot-out

10’
C2 1-2-3-4-5-5-4-3-2-1 Pass and Shoot Warm-up


Key Points:

Face the puck and pass on the forehand. Stay in each zone until all
players have made a pass.

Description:

1. One then two then three then four then five players leave, one
touch in the ozone, shoot, rebound.
2. Next sequence is 5-4-3-2-1 leave the other way.
3. All players make one pass in each zone.
4. In neutral zone skate figure 8's while facing the puck and making
forehand passes.
*When there is only one player do a figure eight or touch both knees.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221612750


10’
B5 Cross and Drop Sequence


Key Points:

Players are inside the middle circle. Two players skate around and cross and drop then 2 from the other group leave. Leave the puck when dropping and the second player skate behind. Return to line from the wide lanes to avoid collisions.

Description:


1. Two players from one colour skate around the circle and cross and drop then 2 start in the opposite direction.
2. Drop the puck on the other side of circle.
3. Stay onside and 4 shoot then both rebound
4. #3 pass to 4 who drives to the net.
5. #2 cross blueline and pass right away to #1 who one times the shot. Both rebound.

Options:

a. One, two or three players leave at a time.
b. After shooting one or two players defend the next rush, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 3-2, 3-3.
c. Give + go with last shooters. Etc.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154512198

15’ D 3-5 pk instruction Alex with the Backs

T4 D400 - PK 3-5 vs. a Spread PP

Key Points:

The key is to eliminate one timer shots from the point, from the player in the middle and the back door play.

Description:

1. When the puck is passed down the D in front moves to that side.
2. Weak side high player drop low to take away back door one timer.
3. Strong side high player drop down and front the middle attacker.
4. Strong side high player get in shooting lane when puck is at the point.
5. Weak side high player cover middle and take away cross ice pass with stick.
6. Low player eliminate tip ins in front but don't get tied up.
7. D to D pass everyone shift. (Right low player in last minute doesn't move out and back and many openings are created. Important to skate in straight lines from the net out to low, middle, high spots)

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130919153350791

15’ Tom with Torpedoes

5' - DT400 Game of quick transition.
5' - D4 2" Game
D4 –Game with a Joker at the point and below the goal line. Both Jokers must get a pass. Rotate between playing the 2-2 to being a Joker.

7’ Add a regroup before entering offensive zone.
B200 - Regroup 5-0 Middle Drive – Detroit

Key Points:

Everyone joins the attack. First player without the puck go
to the net hard. Next two create a reverse triangle. 4th and
5th attacker join the rush.

Description:

1. Players line up on one side in the neutral zone.
2. Start with a forward passing back to a defenseman.
3. Forwards fill the three lanes.
4. Go D to D and pass up to the forwards.
5. Attack with all five players.
6. Next group of 5 repeat the other way when the rush
crosses the blue line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141216105644494

9’
DT100 Continuous 2-1, 2-2 – Detroit


Key Points:

Face the puck. Forwards attack with speed. D stay in the middle and deny F to F pass. Forwards make the first play near the offensive blue line to force the D to make a decision. D delay the play as much as possible.

Description:

1. F1 and F2 attack vs D1.
2. F3 and F4 support D1 as far as the hash marks.
3. D2 support F1 and F2 passively from the point.
4. D1 make a breakout pass to F3 or F4.
5. F3-F4 attack D2 in the other direction.
6. F5 and F6 support D2 and D3 support F3 and F4.
7. Continue this flow.
8. Add a D to make it a 2 on 2.

Options.
There could be active support with a 2-1 in the nzone and a 3-3 at each end. Another option is to combine active and passive support or add dump ins and regroups.


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101208083750407

9’
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout
Key Points: Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes.
Description: 1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.
*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595


Blue Practice Plan 08-01-15

Posted on: January 11 2015 @ 10:07 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan Date: 08-01-15 17:30-18:30 Venue: SP

Notes:
1-1, 2-1, 2-2, backchecking, dzone face-off

3’ Jim big moves the 7’ drill
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots

Key Points:

3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from
the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3
lanes and shoot.

Description:

1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

10’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on 1 on each side vs. #2.

*With younger players stagger the start so each corner leaves after the first pass.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

10’
C6 - Low Breakout - Regroup - 2-1 and 3-2– Detroit


Key Points:

Do everything with speed. D skate between dots before passing. Attackers make the first pass early. A 2-1 is really a 2-2 with the defender and the goalie. Defender identify the most dangerous attacker.

Description:

1. D1 skate back and get the puck placed below the goal line by the coach.
2. D1 pass to F1 and follow.
3. F1 regroup with D2.
4. F2 join F1 and attack D1 2 on 1.
5. D2 go back and retrieve a new puck placed by the coach at the opposite end.
6. D2 passes to F3 who regroups with D3 and F4 join.
7. Repeat this flow.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141119103710146

10’
DT100 - 2 on 2 Backchecking Game - Nzone Regroup


Key Points:

Supporting players play like wingers at the top of the circles. Give targets, face the puck and make all plays while skating. Create a 2-1 vs. the widest defender.

Description:

1. R1-R2 attack vs. B1-B2.
2. B3-B4 support at the top of the circles.
3. Goal, frozen puck or transition B1- or B2 pas to either B3 or B4.
4. B3 and B4 skate over the red line and then regroup with either B1 or B2.
5. B1-B2 hinge and pass to B3 or B4.
6. R3-R4 attack vs R1-R2.
7. Continue this flow with R3 and R4 supporting at the top of the circles.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=2013021009195661

10’
DT100 Game with Forward Backchecking


Key Points:

The highest attacking F backcheck and backpressure the puck thru the neutral zone.

Description:


DT100 Full Ice with extra players waiting along the boards in the neutral zone.

1. Start by attacking 1-1 up to a 3-2.
2. F and D give passive support above the circles.
3. On breakout pass the highest F backcheck.
5.Waiting players can take away the puck if it comes above the circles.
6. Practice back pressure on even situations.

Dzone face-off win

5’
E1 Rebound


Key Points:

Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.

Description:


1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter.
3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed.
5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.

Meet at Geibs to watch Jr. game





Calgary Minor Hockey Week

Posted on: January 14 2015 @ 02:17 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Calgary Minor Hockey Week is the biggest hockey tournament in the world. There are 11,000 players participating. The rule is you get at least two games and you must win your second game to keep going.

There are about 60 indoor ice rinks in Calgary which has 1.2 million people.

Our Bantam AA (U15) has 12 teams. We lost our first game and have won the next two in shootouts. There are 4 teams left and we play Thursday evening and if we win that play in the final on Saturday.


Blue Practice Plan 12-01-15

Posted on: January 15 2015 @ 01:46 AM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 12-01-15 Time: 16:00-17:15 Venue: SP

Notes:
16 skaters, pass, review dzone coverage Attack from the point, attack from behind the
Net.


6’
B2 Transition Skate Shooting


Key Points:

Keep 2 hands on the stick and keep the feet moving. Hit the net.

Description:

B2 Transition Skate Shooting

1. Lineup on blue lines.
2. Skate to top of circle, back to blue, top of circle and shoot.
3. Next player leave when the first is going backward.
4. Each player have 3 or 4 pucks and keep shooting until they are all gone.
(got this drill coaching withTim Bothwell at the U of Calgary)

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120418155124444

5’ B6 3 lane skate and shoot from the corner

5’
B600 Give Go Shoot x 2 – Pro


Key Points:

Shoot while skating and follow the shot for a rebound.

Description:

1. Players A and C leave from diagonal corners.
2. A pass to B and C pass to D at the far blue line.
3. B and D one touch the puck back.
4. A-C skate in and shoot, rebound and rebound for the next shooter.
5. B and D leave and repeat in the other direction.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141027151948931

6’
B600 Give and Go x 3 x 2 - Shoot – Pro


Key Points:

Pass and shoot while skating, give a target, keep the hands away from the body, keep the puck in the sweet spot.

Description:

A. Leave with a puck from diagonal corners.
B. One touch pass in this order 1-2-3-4 and 3-4-1-2.
C. Next pass in the other direction in this order 4-3-2-1 and 2-1-4-3 .
D. Follow the shot and rebound.
E. Circle back and rebound for the next shooter.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014102809043486

5’ Instruction on making plays from behind the net. Short side pass and back door play.

10’
B500 Defensive Zone Skating


Key Points:

Players skate according to their position in the defensive zone. You should skate as if there is an attacker in front of the net and three attackers cycling on the strong side with the middle forward covering the front of the net.

Description:


1. Players start off with a box and one in the middle.
2. Coach points to where the puck is and the players hustle to the proper defensive position.
3. Sticks in the passing lanes and a man-you-puck triangle for role 4.
4. Skate to 5 spots.
5. Straight line stop and start skating.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090817105908648

6’
B600 Give and Go x 3 x 2 - Shoot – Pro


Key Points:

Pass and shoot while skating, give a target, keep the hands away from the body, keep the puck in the sweet spot.

Description:

A. Leave with a puck from diagonal corners.
B. One touch pass in this order 1-2-3-4 and 3-4-1-2.
C. Next pass in the other direction in this order 4-3-2-1 and 2-1-4-3 .
D. Follow the shot and rebound.
E. Circle back and rebound for the next shooter.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014102809043486

6’
DT400 Active Jokers at Point


Key Points

Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots.
This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot

Description:

Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.

1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.

Part Two:

4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

5’ D4 Two Second Game

Players can only have the puck for up to 2”..

20’ Walk through dzone then sticks updsie down on defense. 5-5

T2-T4 Cougar Pounce System (2-2-1 or 1-3-1)

Key Points:

Constant pressure from the defensive side. Back pressure, Offensive and defensive 2-1's. Man on
box behind in Dzone. 2-2-1 forecheck when close pressure or 1-3-1 when offense has total control with skates up ice.

Description:

This system combines the left wing lock and the torpedo. There are two offensive forwards the C and RW. The left wing plays like a left wing in the offensive end and a left D in the defensive
zone and lines up on lw at the faceoff. The LW and RD stay on their side of the ice. The right D plays like a RW in the offensive zone and a RD in our end. The LD is really a middle D and is on
the puck side in the offensive end and LW the support player low in the defensive zone, always on the puck side. The RW and C cover the points in the D zone and force the puck on the attack.
They can forecheck either in a 2-2-1 or a 1-3-1 formation. There are always 4 players on the attack.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080727110405661

10’ Did this after the shooting drills.

B6-600 Flow - Breakout 2 F Shoot - D Point Shot – Finland U20

Key Points:

Make hard passes, give a target, keep skating while making plays, follow shots for rebounds, stop at the net, screen.

Description:

Start at both ends with players on each side of the net and pucks in all four corners.
1 – D1 start by skating up an back get a puck and bank pass behind the net to D2. D1 goes to the corner.
2 – D2 pass to F1 breaking along the boards.
3 – F2 skates to the big ice between the dots and pass to F2. D2 follow then circle back to the corner.
4 – F2 skate down and shoot then skate to corner. F1 skate around the middle circle for a pass from D2.
5 – D1 bump a puck to D2 who skates between the dots and pass to F1 who skates down ice and shoots.
6 – D2 then follow the play up the ice and get a pass from F2 in the corner then drag and shoot – F1-F2 screen.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20140426122809756

5’ players choice





Blue Practice Plan 17-01-15

Posted on: January 17 2015 @ 09:15 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 17-01-15 - 17:30-18:45 Arena: Southland

Notes:

Compete, games, one net, full ice, transition Battle, tournament, pass, point shots, D breakout options


15’
B Skills Warm up Finnish U17

Alex go thru breakout options and point shots, Jim Skill with F’s.

Key Points:

This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact

Description

A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.
B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - #8 around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to otherlines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the nzone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140131221040649


8’
B4 1-0 Outside-Middle Shots - Czech U17 and Two Pro


Key Points:

Keep skating, give a target and pass hard and pass while moving. Hit the net and follow the shot. Rebound for the next shooter.

Description:


1. All players and pucks are in the middle.
2. One player leave from each side.
3. Player 2 pass to player 1 who circles between the red and blue line.
4. Player 1 skate in and shoot after the third pass.
5. After shooting player 1 circle back and rebound for the next shooter.
6. Alternate sides and player 3 leaves after the first pass.
7. Circle left and right so shots come from both in the middle and the outside lanes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154629528

7’
B5 Czech Stretch Pass


Key Points:

Forward must read the defenseman has good control before stretching. Another F must come across the middle to give an outlet option.

Description:

1. F on each side pass to the D.
2. D do a tight turn and drive skate up ice.
3. F fly down the boards.
4. D pass to forward,
5. F shoot and follow the shot.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090208152001852

Tournament: 4 teams of 4 8’ Games

Game One

1 vs. 4
2 vs. 3

10’
D4 - Goals Must Originate Below Goal Line


Key Points:

Players learn to protect the puck, pass to themselves off the boards or back of the net and use the net for puck protection. Also change the point of attack. Defenders must see the puck and the player they are covering and goalie must look over their shoulder and move side to side.

Description:


1. Play game situations from 1-1 to 5-5.
2. Situations 3 on 3 or less the players must keep the puck below the top of the circles.
3. To start an attack the puck must be moved below the goal line.
4. When the defenders get the puck they have to get it deep below the goal line before they can score.

9’
Game Two


2 vs 4
1 vs 3

DT400 Game of Quick Transition

Key Points:

The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.

Description:


1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Upt to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack.
5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

9’
Game Three


3 vs. 4
1 vs. 2

DT400 Low Battles with Jokers at Point


Key Points:

Attackers must go to the net to screen, for rebounds, tips and cycle low. Defenders must talk and stay man on man unless impossible and then switch. Box out, seal sticks to the outside, tie up sticks in the slot.

Description:

1. The game is played from the top of the circles down.
2. Play from 1-1 to 3-3.
3. Players must pass to the point to go onto offense.
4. Joker at the point must take a wrist or snap shot.

* Keep score and when in the teaching mode stop the play and have player who doesn't cover someone do 5 push-ups and his teammates 1 PU.


9’
DT100 Continuous 2-1, 2-2 – Detroit


Key Points:


Face the puck. Forwards attack with speed. D stay in the middle and deny F to F pass. Forwards make the first play near the offensive blue line to force the D to make a decision. D delay the play as much as possible.

Description:

1. F1 and F2 attack vs D1.
2. F3 and F4 support D1 as far as the hash marks.
3. D2 support F1 and F2 passively from the point.
4. D1 make a breakout pass to F3 or F4.
5. F3-F4 attack D2 in the other direction.
6. F5 and F6 support D2 and D3 support F3 and F4.
7. Continue this flow.
8. Add a D to make it a 2 on 2.

Options. There could be active support with a 2-1 in the nzone and a 3-3 at each end. Another option is to combine active and passive support or add dump ins and regroups.


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101208083750407

8’
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Key Points:

The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:

1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227


Blue Practice 19-01-15

Posted on: January 22 2015 @ 02:18 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice 19-01-15

We met at Winsport where the team met with Derek Robertson the Mental Performance coach from Hockey Canada. It is the 4th time he has had a session with the players. The theme was preparation and commitment. It was a good session with lots of player input. Derek sent these video links for the players to watch how the Navy Seals and Carey Price prepare themselves.

Here are some good videos from the Navy Seals and Carey Price.

Navy Seals

https://www.dropbox.com/sh/2odxlvwpsghlbjj/AAAkWkBkXwWTaUhWXN3DaLo-a?dl=0

Carey Price and dealing with adversity

https://www.dropbox.com/sh/4vi7qhohtrjrsnp/AADvjyH-xgur5qxaIMYDsG7-a?dl=0

Following the Mental Performance session we had a one hour ice session run by the HC staff with the focus on individual defensive skills. They asked me what the team needed to work on and then planned the practice. It was helpful with a lot of details on body position and playing from the defensive side.


Blue Practice Plan 21-01-14

Posted on: January 22 2015 @ 02:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 21-01-14

Time: 16:30-17:30 Venue: Shouldice

Notes:
Dzone and forecheck review, 1-1, 2-1, Pass while skating, breakout, regoup

8’
B3 Passing and Partner Practice


Key Points:

This is a great formation for partners to work together on passing or puck handling. You can even progress to one net or cross ice games and include more players. Practice shooting quickly, Use many moves vs. a passive opponent and increase the movement progressing to cross ice games.

Description:

1.Partner pass stationary and then skating. Incorporate going around each other as well. Forehand, backhand and saucer passes.
2. Skate across ice and shoot at boards.
3. Skate-give and go-deke-shoot quickly.
4. Skate-give and go-deke moving D-Shoot.
5. Give-go,defender close gap-deke-shoot.
6. Partner keep-away.
7. 2-2 keep-away

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120430092803104

8’ Add cross and drop
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot

Key Points:

This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.

Description:

1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

8’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on 1 on each side vs. #2.
*With younger players stagger the start so each corner leaves after the first pass.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

15’
Box Plus One – D-Zone Coverage


Walk Through the DT400 with sticks upside down.


9’ C3 - Double Regroup 3-2 Pro W

Key Points:

Snap the puck around with hard accurate passes and then regroup with each D. Work on passing to the middle into the ‘Big Ice’ where there are more options. Practice everything with speed.

Description:


1. Start with 3 forwards and two sets of D in the neutral zone.
2. Pass the puck between the 3 F and 2 D until the whistle.
3. Regroup with both sets of D.
4. Attack the original D 3 on 2.
5. 3 new F’s pass with 2 D who were on the ice while the 2 new D come on.
6. Regroup with original 2 D on the whistle then again with the other D.
7. Focus on passing to the middle to start the attack.
8. Attack with speed and focus on the middle drive and not the slower trailer play.
9. New group start passing around while the 3 on 2 is played out.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131119154718331

12’ Forecheck Review
D1 Full Ice 5-5 Team Scrimmage


Key Points:

Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:

Players change on their own and coach stop the play for face-off coverage review.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

E1 Two Shot Shootout

Key Points:

Players should come in and make a hard move and shoot. The general rule on a breakaway is if the goalie is out far deke and if he backs in shoot.

Description:

1. Teams lines up across from each other and the pucks are in the middle circle.
2. One player from each team leaves and shoot at opposite ends.
3. The same players turn back and get another puck from the middle and shoot at the other end.
4. Continue until all the players have shot and keep score.

You can also decide the winner by saying the most goals in a certain time or the first team to 10 or another total wins.


- Players that score no goals do 2 laps, those who score one goal skate one lap and those who score on both shots zero laps.


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110324144209198

22-01-15 Players do off-ice training at Crash Conditioning. Lots of core work.


Friday off and game on Saturday.

The team got to the semi-finals in the 12 team Minor Hockey Week. Scoring lots of goals but giving up too many.


Blue Practice Plan 25-01-14

Posted on: January 25 2015 @ 04:31 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Played our first game in 10 days and were disjointed in a 5-5 tie. Two short for 6'. This week we again don't play til Saturday but have 3 practices. Sunday 60', Tuesday 90', Thursday 60' and dryland training Wednesday. We will focus on team play in the 90' Tuesday practice. We haven't been getting enough practices the last month and need a review of the forecheck, pk, pp.
-----------------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 25-01-14

Themes:
Defense breakout-shooting review Torpedoes – offensive skills, Goalies – square to the puck. Condition and agility skate,
Transition, 1-1, 2-2, Regroup, hinge, Quick up,

3'
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:

Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.

Description:

1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113


Tom and Ron-D, Jim-T, JF-Goalies 10’ each

20'
B Skills Warm up Finnish U17


Key Points:

This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on technique and rebound control.

14'
Description
A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs. one forechecker.
B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - #8 around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.
C. Goalies work with coach at one end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140131221040649

6’
C6 1-1's from the Corner
Key Points:
This is a drill the Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used. You can do 2-1 and 2-2 as well. Stay D side stick on the puck, body on body and keep a tight gap within a stick length.
Description:
1-1's from the corner
1. Defender 1 skate to the opposite corner and defend vs attacking player 2.
2. On the whistle player 2 now skates to the opposite corner and defends vs player 3.
3. Player 3 will try to score and then defend vs player 4 and continue this flow.
Move the line-up to the top of the circle and start from there.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2013052209072488


10’
B600 Double Regroup Options


Key Points:

Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:

1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10’ 1-1 and 2-1
DT400 2/3 Ice Games of Attack-Defend-Breakout


Key Points:

Attacker make quick moves and go to the net. Defender play a tight gap and stay on the defensive side always. Backchecker come hard to create a defensive 2-1 and get open for a breakout pass. Goalie fight to find the puck if there is a screen.

Description:

This is a half or 2/3 ice transition game. It can be played 1-1 or 2-1 or 2-2. The defender gets support from the line in the nzone when the puck crosses the blueline. In this example there are 2 games at one end and one game at the other. It is a college women tryout and there are 3 goalies.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2009072609354752

10’
C6 - Low Breakout - Regroup - 2-1 – Detroit


Key Points:

Do everything with speed. D skate between dots before passing. Attackers make the first pass early. A 2-1 is really a 2-2 with the defender and the goalie. Defender identify the most dangerous attacker.

Description:


1. D1 skate back and get the puck placed below the goal line by the coach.
2. D1 pass to F1 and follow.
3. F1 regroup with D2.
4. F2 join F1 and attack D1 2 on 1.
5. D2 go back and retrieve a new puck placed by the coach at the opposite end.
6. D2 passes to F3 who regroups with D3 and F4 join.
7. Repeat this flow.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141119103710146

10’
A2-B202 Conditioning Agility Skate


Key Points:

Quick feet, shoulder leads in crossovers. Learn to turn with speed in both directions. A puck could be added.

Description:

1. Skate half circles with quick crossovers in 4 groups. Go hard to blue or red line.
2. Redline and back in 6 groups.
3. Red line-back-far blue line in 6 groups.
4. Blue to red-tight turn-back to blue.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090831151041624


Blue Practice Plan 27-01-15

Posted on: January 28 2015 @ 02:44 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Blue Practice Plan 27-01-15

16:15-17:45 Venue: Optimist

Notes:
Ind. Offensive skills, shoot, pass, rebound, Angle, Powewr play, penalty kill, Conditioning skate


10’
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:

3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from
the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3
lanes and shoot.

Description:

1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

Added Jursi 2-0 skate and passfor 4 minutes. Did zig for 6 min.

10’
D4 Two Pass Game with only Forehand Passes then Escape Moves


Key Points:

This game causes a few things to happen. Transition from puck carrier to pass support, checking the puck carrier to covering away from the puck happen very quickly. The puck carrier must use pivoting, escape moves and puck protection skills to pass on the forehand and everyone must face the puck and give a target.

Description:


1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits.
In this game the rule is that you can only pass on the forehand. If a player does a back hand pass the other team gets the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005184904487

15’ 2 groups for 5’ each review 4 on 5

Alex at one end and Tom at the other. Rotate active to teaching.

T2-4 D400 PK and PP Rotation-Detroit

Key Points:

PK outnumber the PP on loose pucks in the corner. PK skate in straight lines. Always one pk denying the mid point and one in front. PP change the point of attack when outnumbered. Rotate the mid point player to the middle or the back door.

Description:

1. Start with everyone in position on the pp and pk.
2. If pk gets the puck start the pplay again from a different spot.
3. On the pplay either the puck or the player moves.
4. PK always lead with the stick on the puck and in passing lanes.
5. PP always give at least two easy outlets.
6. PP give low support when puck on half wall.
7. PK cut the ice in half and force passes that must beat two defenders.
8. Work at each end 30-60" rotate on whistle.
*Game situation: defenders shoot puck to other end.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101206083505234

15’ 2 Groups review 3 on 5
T4 D400 - PK 3-5 vs. a Spread PP


Key Points:

The key is to eliminate one timer shots from the point, from the player in the middle and the back door play.

Description:
1. When the puck is passed down the D in front moves to that side.
2. Weak side high player drop low to take away back door one timer.
3. Strong side high player drop down and front the middle attacker.
4. Strong side high player get in shooting lane when puck is at the point.
5. Weak side high player cover middle and take away cross ice pass with stick.
6. Low player eliminate tip ins in front but don't get tied up.
7. D to D pass everyone shift. (Right low player in last minute doesn't move out and back and many openings are created. Important to skate in straight lines from the net out to low, middle, high spots)

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130919153350791

15’
D100 - T2-4 – Full Ice Specialty Team Practice


Key Points:

Practice the breakout, neutral zone entry, attack, forecheck and power play set up. The penalty killers practice the forecheck, and defensive zone coverage. It is great if you can get another team to practice with you and take turns with 5 min. power plays each in all situations and have a few minutes between each situation to review your systems with the players.

Description:

Divide into two teams with the extra players on the bench. If possible have someone run the score clock to make it game like.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090802114800166

10’
PP-PK Game


5-5 One defender stay in nzone to make it 5-4 at each end.

9’
A2-B202 Conditioning Agility Skate


Key Points:

Quick feet, shoulder leads in crossovers. Learn to turn with speed in both directions. A puck could be added.

Description:

1. Skate half circles with quick crossovers in 4 groups. Go hard to blue or red line.
2. Redline and back in 6 groups.
3. Red line-back-far blue line in 6 groups.
4. Blue to red-tight turn-back to blue.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090831151041624

6’
E1 Shootout Race 1


Key Points


Players must have one skate on the dot at the start. No hooking or tripping. Skate to get D side and get the puck. *This is a great contest for puck protection, battling, scoring and a good anaerobic conditioning exercise. Keep score with one colour vs the other.

Description

1. Players are lined up behind the face of dots at each end.
2. A player from each team race for the puck which the coach puts on the middle dot.
3. Protect the puck and try to score vs backchecking opponent.
4. Another puck on the dot and repeat the other way.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723063235226


Blue Practice Plan 01-02-15

Posted on: February 02 2015 @ 12:34 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Last 5 games we have scored between 5-7 goals but are giving up too many. Last two a 5-5 tie and a 6-5 win. We play a very high risk team game right now. i.e. Leading 6-2 and D joing the cycle and giving up 2-1's and the score ends up 6-5. So a review of our forecheck and decision making on when to pressure and when to contain. Our games are never boring.
------------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 01-02-15 Time: 13:15-14:30 Venue: Henry Viney

Notes:
Pass, overspeed, puck handle, compete, Battle, 1-1, 2-2, 4-4, transition, review forecheck


7’
A200 Big Moves _ Russian Warm-up


Key Points:

Increase the size of the moves by reaching as far as possible with the puck. Separate the movement of the upper and lower body by skating away from the puck. Players must be able to handle the puck under control around and through their body.

Description:
- Skate away from the puck. Skate right reach left and skate left and reach right.
- Reach as far forward and back as you can using the top hand.
-Put the puck from the stick to inside and outside edges back to the stick.
-Move puck from behind to front through skate forehand and backhand.
-Escape moves backward with the puck and tight turns each way.
-Fake a shot and go left then right. Spin on backhand.
-Touch each knee while skating.
- Yo-yo the puck give it and take it away.
- Toe drag fake inside and pull the puck back while sliding back.
- Bring the puck from behind to in front through the skates on forehand.
- Bring the puck from behind to in front through the skates on backhand.
- Skate fake inside and go outside.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722140651119


8’
A200 Russian Puck Handling – Fake Shots and Finnish with a Shot


Key Points:

The idea of stick handling is to protect the puck from the opponent or to make him/her reach or straighten their knees and then go around them.

Description:

Players are in four lines and do multiple fake shots and moves, then finish with a shot.

. Practice Faking a slapshot with a hard back swing.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the backhand side.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the forehand side.
. Fake a slapshot and then do a backhand tight turn around opponent.
. Fake a slapshot and reach out like you are going around the opponent on your forehand and then pull the puck quickly to your backhand and go around opponent.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130321101649551

7’
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass then Partner Passing


Key Points:


Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.

Description:

1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

8’
C3 Reijo 1-1 Both Sides - Gap Control


Key Points:

The defender needs to get within a sticklength of the attacker before the blueline. Attacker should try moves, dekes, fakes, change of pace, shooting beside the D's foot. Both F's and D's should take turns defending and attacking.

Description:

1. Attacker and defender both skate from the middle back to their blueline.
2. Attacker turns and goes 1-1 vs defender.
3. Done on both sides of the ice alternating direction.
4. Could do 2-1, 1-2, 2-2.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823122856482

7’
B3 Partner Passing – Saucer Passes


Key Points:


Partner pass starting standing and then skating back and forth. Wrist passes, snap passes, saucer. Go from forehand to backhand and backhand to forehand. Add tight turns. Players could also pass two pucks at once.

Description:

Players face each other in two lines skating cross ice.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080720235041115

20’
D at one end with Alex. Point shots and 2 on 2 quick transition.


B2 Point Shot-Screen, Point to Low then Across – Pro

Key Points:

The key is for D1 move between the dots and hit the net. On the second play D1 must freeze the defender with a fake shot and then pass down to F1. F2 must give a target and be strong on his stick to tap a hard pass in.

Description:


1. F1 pass to D1 at the point.
2. D1 drag and shoot while F2 screen and F1 go to the net for a tip or rebound.
3. F1 get a new puck and pass to D1.
4. D1 fake a shot and pass straight down to F1.
5. F1 skate at the net to become a threat and pass across to F2 who slides back to the far post.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131223153030902

T at one end and D at the other.

DT400 Quick Transition Game - U15

Key Points:

Players must quickly transition between the 4 game playing roles.

Offense: Role 1. Puck carrier. Role 2. Support puck carrier.

Defense: Role 3. Check puck carrier. Role 4. Cover away from the puck.

Description:

1. Play 2 on 2 to focus on transition between the four game playing roles.
2. Extra players wait at the blue line or to create a tight area game at the top of the circles.
3. Attack and try to score.
4. On a goal, frozen puck or turn-over the defending team pass to waiting teammates.
5. New offensive players attack vs. the players who lost the puck on offense.
6. Players who passed now rest.

* Keep score and have tournaments.

* Any number from 1-1 to 5-5 can be used and move the waiting players to reduce or expand space.

* Modified rules can be used to focus on individual or team skill.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141224104512232

Torpedoes

D400 Best Player Wins the Game 1 on 1 on 1

Key Points:

-Battle hard for the puck.
-Protect the puck.
-Get a shot and fight for the Rebound.

Description:

1. Players line up outside the blueline. They can be in 3 teams and keep score or just everyone vs
everyone.
2. Coach fires the puck in and whoever gets the puck tried to score vs the other two.
3. If another player gets the puck he tries to score; including rebounds.
4. On whistle pass back to the coach and race out.
5. 20-30 second shifts.

Torpedoes

DT400 Battle in Front 1-1, 2-2

Key Points:

Defender see the puck and his man. Player behind the net must keep his skates below the goal line but can wrap around score. Battle for the net side. Protect the puck, shoot quick, goalie track the puck. *Alternative is to have 2-2 with either one or two Jokers. Keep score.

Description:

1. Play 1-1 in front with a Joker behind the goal line.
2. Joker can score but skates must be below the goal line.
3. Rotation is 1 behind the net is the new defender.
4. The original defender 2 becomes the attacker.
5. Original attacker returns to the line in the corner.

Rotation Sequence:

a. on a goal,
b. the goalie freezes the puck,
c. it is passed to 4 in the corner
d. goes out of the zone.

10’
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2


Key Points:

Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles. Defenders play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush.

10 sit-ups when scored on.


Description:

1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 2 on 2 attack F1 and F2 vs D1 and D2.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive F1 and F2 support D and attacking team D1 and D2 support F's.
4. Play 4 on 4 in the zone.
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. The supporting players who joined the play now go 2 on 2 in the other direction.
7. F2 - F3 support D1 and D2 and D3 and D4 support attacking F1 and F2.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141210845

8’
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout


Key Points:

Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes.

Description:

1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.

*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.

1 lap for every puck left on losing team.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595




Blue Practice Plan 05-02-15

Posted on: February 06 2015 @ 05:18 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Players told me that they really liked this practice.
---------------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan - 05-02-15

16:00-17:15 Arena: Blunden


Notes:

Pass, shoot, 2-0, 2-1, 2-2, 3-3, battle, Point shots, box out, take sticks.


7’
B202 Warm-up - Finland Pro


Key Points:

Skate and handle the puck with lots of quick turns and moves. Give a target for a pass. Follow the shot for a rebound then rebound for the next shooter.

Description:

1. Reds on one blue line and blue at the other.
2. Two reds and two blues handle the puck in the neutral zone for about 10'.
3. Leave one at a time to shoot at the end they start from.
4. Players now pass to players on the lines for 10' then skate in and shoot.
5. Rebound for the next shooter.
* Players could give and go with the next shooter after they have shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150205101301794


7’
B600 - Regroup with D 2-0 x 2 – Detroit


Key Points:

No need for whistles as the players can see when to start. Face the puck, pass hard, give targets, shoot and follow the shot and stop at the net.

Description:

1. Forwards and defense leave from diagonal four blue lines.
2. F1 at each end pass back to D1 and mirror D1.
3. D1 skate across and pass up the far wing to F2.
4. F1 and F2 attack the net from both ends.
5. Start at the other diagonal blue lines and F3 pass to D2.
6. F3 mirror D2 across the ice and attack 2-0 with F4.
7. Keep this rhythm alternating sides.

* Option: Have the D join the rush and get a trailer pass. If there is a group less than 18 you may want to go one group at a time and then the D could join and get a pass from the corner to shoot while F's screen.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2014100209062168

8’
C6 - Low Breakout - Regroup - 2-1 – Detroit


Key Points:

Do everything with speed. D skate between dots before passing. Attackers make the first pass early. A 2-1 is really a 2-2 with the defender and the goalie. Defender identify the most dangerous attacker.

Description:

1. D1 skate back and get the puck placed below the goal line by the coach.
2. D1 pass to F1 and follow.
3. F1 regroup with D2.
4. F2 join F1 and attack D1 2 on 1.
5. D2 go back and retrieve a new puck placed by the coach at the opposite end.
6. D2 passes to F3 who regroups with D3 and F4 join.
7. Repeat this flow.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141119103710146

10’
DT400 Transition Game of 1 on 1 and 2-1 - Yursi-Juuso IIHF Symposium


Key Points:


Defender must maintain a tight gap and stay of the defensive side. Attacker use moves to beat the defender, fight for rebounds and loose pucks. On the dump-ins the defender must read where the checker is coming from and the attacker create good checking angles.

Description:

1.Divide the team into two colours and opposite forwards and defense play against each other at both ends.
2. F1 attack vs. D1 after skating through the middle circle. 3. Fight for rebounds and loose pucks. 4. On transition pass to F2 at the top of the circle. 5.F2 skate through the middle circle and attack vs. D2. 6. Add a regroup with the forward circling back. 7. Add a neutral zone dump-in and the D and F fight for the loose puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131203153607732

15’
T3-4 King-Kozak Defensive Zone, 3-3
Wally Kozak run the drill.

Key Points:

Defensive player must quickly close the gamp and maintain defensive side and with stick on the puck, body on body.

Description:

1. Defender or defenders start on two knees in front of the net.
2. Attacker stands waiting for a pass from the coach. If multiple attackers then spread out.
3. Coach passes to the attacker and defender stands and defends.
4. Add another attacker and defender.
6. Add a third attacker.
7. If the puck is cleared, frozen or a goal the coach quickly passes another puck to an attacker and the play re-starts.

*Option is to have uneven situations and add attackers and defenders as you go.

*To create more space the coach and waiting players move back to the blue line. You can go up to 5-5 with this drill.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150202092547285

10’
DT400 3-3 Krusel Battling Game - ProW


Key Points:

Battle for loose pucks, screen the goalie, shot passes, cycle, man on man, tie up sticks, tip, low zone play.

Description:

1. Line up with the face-off dots and 1 to 3 players race for a loose puck on the whistle.
2. Pass to the point to transition to offense.
3. Point player must shoot or pass within 2 seconds.
4. If a point pass goes out the other pointman gets the puck.
5. Either leave the puck in the zone or pass to the coach on a whistle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131008150727357

10’
D200 2-2 Tight Area Game - Pro


Key Points:

Protect the puck, use fakes, escape moves, change of direction, feints, shoot and pass quickly, triple threat position.

Description:

1. Nets at each end of the circle and players start from the side.
2. Coach shoot a puck in (or player pass to teammate on the whistle.
3. Play 10-15” shifts.
4. Keep score.

*Option is to play form 1-1 to 3-3, - 1-1, 2-1, 3-2, 3-3.

In this video demo watch Red 53 Gaudreau and 63 Bennet, who have exceptional tight moves. #53 scores a few goals because he does things so quickly.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706173522508

8’
D200 – Pass to Jokers at Each End – U17 Austria


Key Points:

Players transition from Role 1- puck carrier to Role 2 – puck support to Role 3 – check puck carrier to Role 4 – defend away from the puck. Good habits like giving a target, face the puck, get open, skate to open ice with the puck are practiced.

Description:

1 – Play 2 on 2 and each team has one Joker behind each net.
2 – When you regain the puck you must regroup with the Joker behind the net.
3 – Pass to the Joker behind the offensive net before you can shoot. (Joker can pass to Joker)
4 – Rotate on the whistle from the line-up on blue line to play and after playing become the Joker and Jokers to the line-up (you could do it opposite as well)
*Option: Jokers can check Jokers and the players on the sides can be activated to also be eligible for passes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090817103542544



Blue Practice 09-02-15

Posted on: February 11 2015 @ 02:25 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We had a really good practice on Sunday the 8th but I can't find the file. We were 6-3-1 in 2015 going into last nights game. We lost 3-1 in a really fast well played contest. We got good goaltending and they got great goaltending as he made about 10 exceptional saves. Maybe our best game of the season. We have two more league games and then the 12 teams are put into 3 groups of 4 and play a double knock out tournament. The season is basically a seeding round as the idea of U15 AA is development. We got to the semi-final of an earlier tournament with everyone. So we have a chance. The league is pretty even and 13-14 year old boy's have huge highs and lows. A great bunch to coach.
--------------------------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 09-02-15


Time: 17:30-18:30 Arena: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Edges, dzone review, passing, 3-0, 3-1, 3-2

8’
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:

Move the puck all around the body in two circles going
opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges
and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:

1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and
shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite
way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching
the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to
the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot
and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside
edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the
outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the
opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

7’
B4 1-0 Outside-Middle Shots - Czech U17 and Two Pro


Key Points:


Keep skating, give a target and pass hard and pass while
moving. Hit the net and follow the shot. Rebound for the
next shooter.

Description:

1. All players and pucks are in the middle.
2. One player leave from each side.
3. Player 2 pass to player 1 who circles between the red and
blue line.
4. Player 1 skate in and shoot after the third pass.
5. After shooting player 1 circle back and rebound for the
next shooter.
6. Alternate sides and player 3 leaves after the first pass.
7. Circle left and right so shots come from both in the
middle and the outside lanes.

* The first video demo is the Czech National U17 Team and
the next two are with pro players.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154629528

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706215731742

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140706153625664

10’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on
the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One
the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one
slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the
most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of
the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and
attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to
the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral
zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on
1 on each side vs. #2.

*With younger players stagger the start so each corner
leaves after the first pass.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

15’ review
T4 Teaching Defensive Zone Coverage 2-1-2


Key Points:

Sticks upside down
Tie up sticks in the slot, keep sticks in the passing lane
and shin pads in front of the
puck.
When doing man on and box behind closest player is
aggressive from the inside to the
outside body on body and stick on the puck.

Description:

Teach defensive zone coverage by giving the offense
45 seconds to score.

A. Play a tight box and one in the low slot area.
Players can only move a few strides but
stay in a tight 2-1-2 formation.

B. Closest defender pressure the puck right away
while teammates form a box behind.

10’
C3, 3-0, 3-1, 3-2 - Total Hockey


Key Points:


Attack with a middle drive and speed. Hit the net and
drive for rebounds. Only allow one pass on the 3-0.
Attack with speed and make plays early while
defenders delay the attack.

Description:

1. One group on each side in the neutral zone.
2. Everyone attacks and defends.
3. Play rebounds until a goal or the puck is behind the
net or outside the dots.
4. Coach pass new puck if a goal is scored.
5. One defender follow the rush on 3-0 and two follow
the 3-1 rush.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2013012209054791

10’
E1 Gambling Shootout



Blue Practice Plan 11-02-15

Posted on: February 11 2015 @ 03:01 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We just picked up this 60' ice time to replace the off-ice session originally scheduled. Focus will be on doing everything efficiently. Our players shoot above the waist almost all of the time and goalies can catch or redirect these shots easily. We want to pass off the pads and crash for rebounds. I have 4 very skilled small players who could score a lot more with low shots and rebounds (at 5' and 100 lbs. you don't blow high ones past the goalies.) We also want to practice boxing out and taking sticks in the slot.
---------------------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 11-02-15

Time: 19:00-20:00 Arena: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Efficient play, pass quick, shoot quickly, Pass off the pad and rebound.
Regroups, Hinge, post up.

10’
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:

Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.

Description:

1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.
*Add 2-0 passing and and give and go then shoot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113


10’
B5 Double Cross-Drop-Pass-Shoot Options


Key Points:

Cross over skate, leave the drop pass as still as possible. Pass quickly.
Going to the net for a bang in or practicing a one timer from the high slot is also easy to do.

Description:

Option One: Double Drop-Pass-Shoot
Option Two: Pass Low and One Timer


Pass off the far pad while #2 goes for a rebound. Goalies no stick.

-Repeat as in Option One.

-After second drop B1 pass to B3 or B4.
-B3 or B4 pass to B2 who one time shoots.
-B1 and B2 rebound then wait at goal line for a pass from B5.

10’
DT4 Jokers at the Point Must Shoot


Focus on passing off the pads.

Key Points

Each team has one or two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers. This is a great game to practice getting the shot through under pressure.The jokers at the point must get open and take a shot. The defender practices covering the point. Low players screen, tip and rebound while defenders box out and take sticks.

Description:

Part One:

Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers at the Point Must Shoot
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150103152433301
3. Point Jokers Check Jokers
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150103160641849

Part Two:

4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150103160640456
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.

10’
B600 Double Regroup Options


Key Points:


Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.

Description:


1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.

*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 3-0 Regroup 2-1 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. One forward support on the boards and the other from the middle. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1 or F2 dump the puck in and D1 skate back for the puck.
2. D2 follow the play.
3. D1 make a breakout pass to F1 or F2 and follow.
4. F1 and F2 regroup with D2 in the neutral zone.
5. F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1.
6. F3 or F4 dump the puck into the far end and D2 skate back for the puck-pass to F3-F4.
7. F3 and F4 regroup with D3 in the neutral zone and attack 2-1 vs. D3.

• Continue this flow.

• Vary the number of F from 1 to 3 and use either 1 or 2 D to create more game recognition situations.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093348590

10’
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Key Points:

The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:

1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227


Blue Practice Plan 12-02-15

Posted on: February 12 2015 @ 05:39 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We have one goalie out with a concussion and haven't been able to get an affiliate the last two session, which takes a lot away from the practice. Tonight we will have two goalies. Two U13 top level Pee Wee players, my grandson and his friend whose dad I used to coach at university skated with us. They will be trying out for this level next season.
---------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 12-02-15

16:30-17:30 Arena: Max Bell

Notes:
Backcheck, d join rush, dzone attack and Defend. Battle, timing, pass, shoot



8’ Pass off the pad shots and rebound.
B4 1-0 Outside-Middle Shots - Czech U17 and Two Pro


Key Points:

Keep skating, give a target and pass hard and pass while moving. Hit the net and follow the shot. Rebound for the next shooter.

Description:

1. All players and pucks are in the middle.
2. One player leave from each side.
3. Player 2 pass to player 1 who circles between the red and blue line.
4. Player 1 skate in and shoot after the third pass.
5. After shooting player 1 circle back and rebound for the next shooter.
6. Alternate sides and player 3 leaves after the first pass.
7. Circle left and right so shots come from both in the middle and the outside lanes.
The first video demo is the Czech National U17 Team and the next two are with pro players.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154629528


7’ Pass off the Far Pad
B6 2-0 Middle Drive - Czech U20


Key Points:

Attack with speed and hit the net and the middle player be in good position for a rebound. This is a drill to warm up
the goalies.

Description:

- 1 and 2 leave from diagonal corners at each end.
- 1 is in the middle and pass wide to 2.
- 1 turn and skate to the other side and turn and middle drive the net.
- 2 continue down the wide lane and shoot then rebound.
- If there is a rebound finish the play.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121204145928587

15’
D4 Baggo - Czech U20


Key Points:

Face the puck. Get open for a pass and give a target. Goals on one timer shots.

Description:

1. Offensive team must pass within one second.
2. Goals must be on one timers.
3. If the puck goes outside of the zone the other team gets it.
4. On transition to offense there must be at least one pass before you can shoot.

Rotate teams half way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=83

8’
C6 1-1 to 2-2 - D Join F Backcheck – Multiple Examples


Key Points:

D join the attack on the whistle and attacking forwards back check. It is a fight for inside position. No penalties. Important that the forwards touch the red line so F1-D1 are close enough to join the play.

Description:

1. Blue D1 pass to Red F1 who skates to the red line and turns back attacking 1-1 vs. D1.
2. On the whistle Red D2 passes to Blue F2 at the other end of the rink.
3. Blue F2 skates to the red line and turns back attacking 1-1 vs Red D2. while Red D1 Joins Red F1 on the attack and White F1 backchecks making it a 2-2.
4. Repeat with Blue D3 passing to Red F3 at original end.
*Situations up to a 3-2 can be practiced. You need at least 8 D and 12 F to practice 3-2 with a 5-5 at each end. With larger number the lineup needs to move into the neutral zone to leave inside the blueline free.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120718110748616

12’ Do 3 on 3 4-4, 5-5
T3-4 King-Kozak Defensive Zone


Key Points:

Defensive player must quickly close the gamp and maintain defensive side and with stick on the puck, body on body.

Description:

1. Defender or defenders start on two knees in front of the net.
2. Attacker stands waiting for a pass from the coach. If multiple attackers then spread out.
3. Coach passes to the attacker and defender stands and defends.
4. Add another attacker and defender.
6. Add a third attacker.
7. If the puck is cleared, frozen or a goal the coach quickly passes another puck to an attacker and the play re-starts.

*Option is to have uneven situations and add attackers and defenders as you go.

*To create more space the coach and waiting players move back to the blue line. You can go up to 5-5 with this drill.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150202092547285

10’
DT400 3-3 Krusel Battling Game - ProW


Key Points:

Battle for loose pucks, screen the goalie, shot passes, cycle, man on man, tie up sticks, tip, low zone play.

Description:

1. Line up with the face-off dots and 1 to 3 players race for a loose puck on the whistle.
2. Pass to the point to transition to offense.
3. Point player must shoot or pass within 2 seconds.
4. If a point pass goes out the other pointman gets the puck.
5. Either leave the puck in the zone or pass to the coach on a whistle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131008150727357

5'
F202 Short Bursts between the blue lines in 4 groups. Defenders come return backwards.


- Red and back.
- Red back blue back.
- Red back past far blue.
- Halfway to red and back then red and back.


Blue Practice Plan 15-02-15

Posted on: February 18 2015 @ 02:18 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The affiliate goalie,who was supposed to fill in for out injured goalie didn't come, so we couldn't do some of these activities. I replaced them with the ones in this unedited 21 minute video.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150218233332779
----------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 15-02-15

Time: 15:30-17”00 Arena: Stu Peppard

Notes:
Dzone, pp, pk, quick release, pass, shoot, Breakout, support, back check, d join rush,

8’
B4-B6 Pass and Shoot ProW


Key Points:

Face the puck and give a target. Shoot while skating and accelerate in corners.

Description:

a. Start - 1 skate down the boards and shoot and follow the shot for a rebound.
b. 2 leave from corner then cross and drop to 1.
c. 1 carry the puck wide and pass back to 2.
d. 2 pass wide to 3.
e. 3 shoot and cross with 4.
f. After passing 1 go to corner, 2 to the centre circle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20131015151134860


8’
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:

Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.

Description:

1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

9’
C6 Regroup x 2, 1-1 and 2-1 – Pro


Key Points:

Defense stay between attacker and net with a tight gap on the 1-1, attack with speed, use skate and stick fakes. One the 2-1 attack with ‘one high and one low, one fast and one slow’, while the defender delay the play and take away the most dangerous shot and deny play across the middle of the goal.

Description:

A. Defenders line up at each end in diagonal corners and attacker in the other diagonal corners.
B. #1 attacker from each corner leave with a puck, skate to the blue line and pass to the #2 near the far blue line.
C. #2 make a deception move and pass to #1 in the neutral zone.
D. #1 skate back and regroup with #3.
E. #1’s on each side attack 1-1 vs. #2.
F. Change the drill and now #3 joins #1 and they attack 2 on 1 on each side vs. #2.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141023113508449

12’ two six minute games
D4 Baggo - Czech U20


Key Points:

Face the puck. Get open for a pass and give a target. Goals on one timer shots.

Description:

1. Offensive team must pass within one second.
2. Goals must be on one timers.
3. If the puck goes outside of the zone the other team gets it.
4. On transition to offense there must be at least one pass before you can shoot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=83

12’
T3-4 King-Kozak Defensive Zone


Key Points:

Defensive player must quickly close the gamp and maintain defensive side and with stick on the puck, body on body.

Description:

1. Defender or defenders start on two knees in front of the net.
2. Attacker stands waiting for a pass from the coach. If multiple attackers then spread out.
3. Coach passes to the attacker and defender stands and defends.
4. Add another attacker and defender.
6. Add a third attacker.
7. If the puck is cleared, frozen or a goal the coach quickly passes another puck to an attacker and the play re-starts.

*Option is to have uneven situations and add attackers and defenders as you go.

*To create more space the coach and waiting players move back to the blue line. You can go up to 5-5 with this drill.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150202092547285

25’ 3 Groups 10’ each. 2 at one end with Alex-Jim
T2-4 D400 Specialty Team Practice – Pro


Key Points:

Team is in two colours or four colours. Skate in straight lines from the net out when killing penalties and only laterally when checking the puck carrier. Sticks in the passing lanes, stick on the puck. Shin pads in front of the puck on shots. On the power play either the puck or player move and rotate positions away from the puck.

Description:

1. Half the team at each end and rotate between pp and pk when the play is at the other end.
2. Start with the coach spotting the puck or with a face-off.
3. The coach put in a new puck when the puck is out of play.
4. Practice all of the options with everyone getting shots.
5. Penalty killers rotate with a diamond vs. a diamond power play and a box when the puck is on the wall or low.
6. Power play create 2 on 1’s and one timer shots.
7. Penalty kill deny shots from the middle first and move to shooters on the sides.
8. This rotation can also be used to practice low zone even strength situations.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130313091238819

8’
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2 D - Join Attack F Backcheck


Key Points:

Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles and one forward backcheck. Play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush. Play 5-5 at each end.

Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 2 on 2 attack Blue F1 and F2 vs Red D1 and D2.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 and F2 support Red D1 and D2 and Blue D1 and D2 support Blue F1 and F2.
4. On transition Red D1 join new attack and Blue F1 backcheck
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. Red F1-F2-D1 now go 3 on 3 in the other direction vs. Blue D1-D2-F1.
7. Blue F2 - F3 support Blue D1-D2-F1 and Red D3 and D4 support attacking Red F1-F2-D1.
8. This rotation continues with a 5-5 in each zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121026092747403

8’
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout


Key Points:

Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes.

Description:

1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.
*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595


Blue Practice Plan 19-02-15

Posted on: February 28 2015 @ 05:50 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 19-02-15

Time: 17:30-18:30 Arena: Blunden

Lines: Notes:
C – Geib, Brunton, Nico, Kaleb RB Max, Jake, Vern, Toro
LT – Rylee, Raine, Michael LB – Gareth, Robbie, Mitch
MB – Josh, Noah, Ryker Pass, shoot, regroup, breakout, 3-2, 5-0



7’
D1 Full Ice All Play – Two Puck Game


Key Points:

Everyone plays shinny style.

Description:

1. All play at the same time. Coach has three pucks.
2. Use two pucks and throw another on the ice when one is scored.
3. Leave the pucks in the net. Count pucks when all three are scored.
4. When the goalie freezes the puck the attackers back up behind the hash marks.

* Only one shot at a time. If the goalie isn’t watching then a goal doesn’t count.


6’
B6 - Shot x 3 Passes x 3 Shots x 3 – Pro


Key Points:

Shoot while skating, head up, give a target, pass hard, lead the player.

Description:

A. 1-2-3 skate around the top of the circle and shoot.
B. 1-2-3 break down the ice for a pass from the oringinal corner.
C. 4 pass to 1, 5 to 2, 6 to 3.
D. 1-2-3 take shots at each end.
* Option is to get a pass from the next player in line first.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20141129115014711

7’
B6 Chaos 3-0 Pass and Shoot


Key Points:

Give a target, pivot to face the puck all the time; use forehand passes and backhand only when passing forward.

Description:

1. Three players leave from each end.
2. Each group passes one puck in nzone.
3. On the whistle player with the puck shoot.
4. Other two players save ice and get a pass from the corner and shoot. a few seconds apart.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101006084345432

8’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 5-0-Regroup-3-2 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. Forwards support on the boards middle and far wing. D practice D to D options and hinges as well as quick ups. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1, F2 or F3 dump the puck in and D1 and D2 skate back for the puck.
2. D3 and D4 follow the play.
3. D1 or D2 make a breakout pass to F1, F2 or F3 and follow up ice.
4. Forwards regroup with D3 and D4 in the neutral zone.
5. F1-F2-F3 attack 3-2 vs. D1-D2.
6. F4-F5-F6 dump the puck into the far end and D3-D4 skate back for the puck and breakout.
7. F4-F5-F6 regroup with D5-D6 in the neutral zone and attack 3-2 vs. D3-D4.

• Continue this flow.

• Instead of the first regroup D3 or D4 could dump the puck in the other corner and D1-D2 break out again before the regroup and 3-2.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093349684

15’ – Team Play

Tom one end dzone skating.

Jim with two groups forecheck review.


10’
TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage


Key Points:

Rotation is Attack-Defend-Rest. Number the players so they know when to not defend. In even numbered situations you can require the defenders to breakout into the neutral zone before passing.

Description:

1. Power play attack vs 2 Fand 2 D.
2. Defenders ice the puck and rest.
3. Group waithing at far blue attack.
4. Original attackers now defend 1 short.
5. Goalies rotate in.
6. Create any situation by changing the number of attackers or defenders.
7. Even strength can also be practiced.

*Option is to have waiting players breakout from behind the goal line and do a pk forecheck.



7’
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 – Finland


Key Points:

The purpose is to attack as quickly as possible and pass and shoot while skating.

Description:

1. Start from one end and when everyone is gone go the other way.
2. Attackers 1 and 2 leave from above the hash marks.
3. Defender 1 is inside the top of the circle with his stick upside down start forward and turn to back skating.
4. Defender 2 start from below the circle and back check.
5. Attacker 1 and 2 race down the ice to score and only ONE PASS is allowed.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227

1’ Team meet in middle circle sticks in cheer.




Blue Practice Plan 24-02-05

Posted on: February 28 2015 @ 05:58 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Blue Practice Plan 24-02-05

Time: 20:30-21:45 Arena: Southland

Notes:
Review 2-1-2 early season forecheck 1-1, 2-1, 3-3, 4-4, pass while skating, Shootout, transition
Meet with team about forecheck at 7:25



8’
B6 3-0 With Multiple Pucks


Key Points:

This is an exercise to overload the nervous system.
Make eye contact before passing and make good firm passes.

Description:


1. Players are in 3 lines below the goal lines in each end.

* A good routine is to pass 3 pucks the first turn, then 2 pucks, then a 3 man weave with one
puck, then add one defense and regroup with him, then add.


file:///D|/Daily%20Drill/B6%203-0%20With%20Multiple%20Pucks.htm


7’
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot


Key Points:

The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.

Description:


1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

8’
C3 Reijo 1-1 Both Sides - Gap Control


Key Points:

The defender needs to get within a sticklength of the attacker before the blueline. Attacker should try moves, dekes, fakes, change of pace, shooting beside the D's foot. Both F's and D's should take turns defending and attacking.

Description:

1. Attacker and defender both skate from the middle back to their blueline.
2. Attacker turns and goes 1-1 vs defender.
3. Done on both sides of the ice alternating direction.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823122856482

15’ Review 2-1-2 Pinch on a Wide Rim

Forecheck in a upside down L

1 on puck
2 on other D
3 mirror puck and force puck on wall. Fill mid point on wide rim
4 support from middle point pinch on wide rim.
5 strong side slide over and support pinch

10’
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage


Key Points:

Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:

Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.

They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

12’
DT100 Continuous 2-1, 2-2 – Detroit


Key Points:

Face the puck. Forwards attack with speed. D stay in the middle and deny F to F pass. Forwards make the first play near the offensive blue line to force the D to make a decision. D delay the play as much as possible.

Description:

1. F1 and F2 attack vs D1.
2. F3 and F4 support D1 as far as the hash marks.
3. D2 support F1 and F2 passively from the point.
4. D1 make a breakout pass to F3 or F4.
5. F3-F4 attack D2 in the other direction.
6. F5 and F6 support D2 and D3 support F3 and F4.
7. Continue this flow.
8. Add a D to make it a 2 on 2.

Options. There could be active support with a 2-1 in the nzone and a 3-3 at each end. Another option is to combine active and passive support or add dump ins and regroups.


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101208083750407

8’
D4 Two Active Jokers Behind the Net


Key Points:

Jokers must learn to protect the puck and make plays on their own or passes. Everyone learns to play low in the zone on offense and defense.

Description:

1. Each team has two low jokers.
2. Jokers can check Jokers.
3. Jokers can score.
4. Jokers can skate out to the face-off lines.
5. Jokers must touch the puck to score.
6. Jokers rotate on their own.
7. Vary between 1 or 2 Jokers and 1 to 4 out players.


7’
E1 Two Shot Shootout


Key Points:

Players should come in and make a hard move and shoot. The general rule on a breakaway is if the goalie is out far deke and if he backs in shoot.

Description:

1. Teams lines up across from each other and the pucks are in the middle circle.
2. One player from each team leaves and shoot at opposite ends.
3. The same players turn back and get another puck from the middle and shoot at the other end.
4. Continue until all the players have shot and keep score.

You can also decide the winner by saying the most goals in a certain time or the first team to 10 or another total wins.

- Players that score no goals do 2 laps, those who score one goal skate one lap and those who score on both shots zero laps.


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110324144209198


Blue Practice Plan 26-02-15

Posted on: February 28 2015 @ 06:10 PM
By: TomM

Content:

If we win the 12 team AA tournament then we will have another practice because the winner plays in the Provincial Championship March 15. If we don't come in first then this is our last official practice unless we get into tournaments. They divided the 12 teams into 3 groups of 4. The top 2 from each group plus two wildcards play tonight. We have qualified and are waiting for the last two games to finish and find out who we play.
-----------------------------------------------------------

Blue Practice Plan 26-02-15

Arena: Stu Peppard

Notes:

3 groups blue, white, red in pp units. Mitch white and Gareth Blue. Team play, breakouts, regroup, pp, pk, Forecheck, dzone, puck handle, shots.


6’
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:

Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:

1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285


6’
B6 Chaos 3-0 Pass and Shoot


Key Points:

Give a target, pivot to face the puck all the time; use forehand passes and backhand only when passing forward.

Description:

1. Three players leave from each end.
2. Each group passes one puck in nzone.
3. On the whistle player with the puck shoot.
4. Other two players save ice and get a pass from the corner and shoot. a few seconds apart.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101006084345432

8’
C3 - Dump-Breakout 5-0-Regroup-3-2 - Continuous – Pro


Key Points:

Defense shoulder check when going back for the puck. Forwards support on the boards middle and far wing. D practice D to D options and hinges as well as quick ups. D skate to the big ice between the dots before passing.

Description:

1. F1, F2 or F3 dump the puck in and D1 and D2 skate back for the puck.
2. D3 and D4 follow the play.
3. D1 or D2 make a breakout pass to F1, F2 or F3 and follow up ice.
4. Forwards regroup with D3 and D4 in the neutral zone.
5. F1-F2-F3 attack 3-2 vs. D1-D2.
6. F4-F5-F6 dump the puck into the far end and D3-D4 skate back for the puck and breakout.
7. F4-F5-F6 regroup with D5-D6 in the neutral zone and attack 3-2 vs. D3-D4.

• Continue this flow.

• Instead of the first regroup D3 or D4 could dump the puck in the other corner and D1-D2 break out again before the regroup and 3-2.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20140905093349684


10’ Wally run the Dzone
T3-4 King-Kozak Defensive Zone


Key Points:

Defensive player must quickly close the gamp and maintain defensive side and with stick on the puck, body on body.

Description:


1. Defender or defenders start on two knees in front of the net.
2. Attacker stands waiting for a pass from the coach. If multiple attackers then spread out.
3. Coach passes to the attacker and defender stands and defends.
4. Add another attacker and defender.
6. Add a third attacker.
7. If the puck is cleared, frozen or a goal the coach quickly passes another puck to an attacker and the play re-starts.

*Option is to have uneven situations and add attackers and defenders as you go.

*To create more space the coach and waiting players move back to the blue line. You can go up to 5-5 with this drill.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20150202092547285

3’ Forecheck Review

7’ Three Team Scrimmage – Defenders sticks upside down.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage


Key Points:

Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:

Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.

They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

Alex and Wally with two groups going over the high press pk at one end and Jim going over the pp at the other.
5’ per group and rotate.


T2-4 D400 Specialty Team Practice

Key Points:

Closest player must pressure the puck in straight lines from the net out. Skate back when the puck is passed. Stick on the ice in the passing lane. Communicate.

Description:

1. A power play and a penalty killing unit at each end of the ice.
2. The coach passes in a puck from the line or from a face off dot.
3. Controlled scrimmage where everyone stops on a whistle.
4. If the puck is frozen, a goal or it is cleared put in a new puck.
5. After about 45 seconds do the same thing from the other end while the pp and pk units switch at the original end.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090806144404128

5’
E1 Rebound Game


This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.

Key Points:

Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.

Description:

1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter.
3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed.
5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407

Since there is a 25% chance we won't be practicing anymore I am posting my updated hockey bio to give the coaches who come here an idea of where my ideas come from.


Final Tournament

Posted on: March 01 2015 @ 04:50 PM
By: TomM

Content:

All 12 teams in the league were put into 3 groups of 4. The top two in each group plus two wild cards advanced. We were 1-1-1 in the group and placed second. We ended up drawing the top team who went 3-0 and won every game by 5+ goals. They have 6 players who scored a lot during the regular season. It was the only team we didn't beat during the season. Scores were 4-4 and 1-3 but always very good, fast paced games.

The score ended 3-5 for them. We outshot them 39-36 but their goalie was very good.

It doesn't sound like we will be in any tournaments. So the season is over.

This is a development league to send players to the AAA Bantam U15 and AAA Minor Midget U16 teams. We carried 7 first year players (rule 6 to 8 on each team) and 12 second year players. Only 2 players on our team had played AA hockey before. So it was a big jump for most of the team.

It was a great group to work with. The players got along with each other and improved a lot as the year went on. I have some really small players and some you could see grow as the year went on. 2 players who were pretty chunky in August really trimmed up. One must have grown 3 inches and has gone from plump to slender. Two of the youngest boy's are still 12 until next December. One defenseman weighs about 90 lbs and stands 4'11" and would be on the AAA team if he was a little bigger. He played many games for them during the season.

We put three small forwards together and they totally dominated by cycling in the offensive zone but they just aren't strong enough yet to have much zip on their shots. I remember coaching two undersized 85 born players at the same age, with similar skill sets. One grew to 6' and has played in the Stanley Cup final and is still in the NHL and the other grew to 5'6" and won the Hobey Baker and is still having a great career in Europe.

There is a lot of potential for these boy's to develop into top end players.

We chart the shots, +/- for each game and I will attach it.



Exit Meetings

Posted on: March 10 2015 @ 04:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Jim and I had an exit meeting with all of the players. We had a 75 minute ice time and then scheduled 10 minutes for each player. It took three hours and ten minutes. We asked them what they thought of their season and discussed what they can work on before try-outs next year.

It was good to get their feedback and get to talk to each player.


Booster Club Award

Posted on: March 15 2015 @ 04:14 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I attended a press conference the other day to be introduced by the Calgary Booster Club as an 'Honoured Athletic Leader' along with coaches from other sports. We will all be introduced at the annual Sportsman of the Year Dinner in mid April. Our names are at the bottom of the article about the woman in Synchronized swimming who is the SOY.

Sun article.

http://www.calgarysun.com/2015/03/12/calgary-booster-club-honours-syncro-supporter#

Herald article.

http://calgaryherald.com/sports/synchronized-swimming-volunteer-honoured-as-booster-club-sportsman-of-the-year


Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: March 15 2015 @ 09:13 PM
By: SMAC

Content:

Well deserved Tom - congratulations !!

____________________________________
Appreciate the comment.

Just got back from our wind up party. The kid's played paint ball and then we had a barbeque at the managers house. Very positive evening.


Re: Diary of a Season 2014-15

Posted on: April 02 2015 @ 03:38 PM
By: ICEMAN

Content:

AWESOME!!! Congratulations Tom.

--------------------------------
Thanks Iceman. I appreciate it.




Hockey Coaching ABCs - Forum
https://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/forum/viewtopic.php?showtopic=6863